1. Communication 4.

Entrepreneurial
Skills - II 1-13 Skills - II 37-48
Competency 1 Competency 37
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 3 NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 39
Previous Years (PYQ) 4 Previous Years (PYQ) 40
Push Yourself 5 Push Yourself 41
Solutions 7 Solutions 43

2. Self - Management 5. Green Skills - II 49-56

Skills - II 14-25 Competency 49
Competency 14 NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 51
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 16 Previous Years (PYQ) 51
Previous Years (PYQ) 16 Push Yourself 52
Push Yourself 18 Solutions 53
Solutions 20

6. Digital
3. Information and Documentation
Communication (Advanced) 57-76
Technology Skills - II 26-36 Competency 57
Competency 26 NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 59
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 27 Previous Years (PYQ) 61
Previous Years (PYQ) 28 Push Yourself 64
Push Yourself 29 Solutions 66
Solutions 31

High difficulty Qs, adapted from

other well-known reference books.

Look for this icon

7. Electronic 9. Managing Health
Spreadsheet and Safety 117-128
(Advanced) 77-93 Competency 117
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 118
Competency 77
Previous Years (PYQ) 121
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 79
Push Yourself 121
Previous Years (PYQ) 80
Push Yourself 84 Solutions 123

Solutions 85

8. Database
Management
System 94-116
Competency 94
NCERT & CBSE Resource Material 96
Previous Years (PYQ) 98
Push Yourself 104
Solutions 105
 1

COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS

(a) Posters (b) Press Conferences
Objective Qs 1 mark
(c) Public Speeches (d) Podcast
1. Identify the sentence in each of the following
5. ............... is the most important aspect of our
sentences where the underlined part is NOT
a phrase. personality and also impacts our social and
public image.
(I) The sun rises in the east.
(a) Eye contact (b) Body language
(II) Humpty Dumpty sat on a wall.
(c) Dressing up (d) Our wealth
(III) He has a chain which is made of gold.
(IV) He has a chain of gold. 6. Understanding the language needs of
(V) We cannot start while its raining. the receiver of the message is essential
(a) (I), (II), (IV) (b) (I), (II), (III), (IV) for effective communication. The given
(c) (I), (II), (IV), (V) (d) (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V) statement:
(a) describes importance of effective
2. The type of communication in which the communication.
sender’s verbal and non-verbal cues both
(b) describes requirements of effective
are important for effective communication:
communication.
(a) Print media
(c) describes measures to overcome barriers
(b) Posters
of communication.
(c) written
(d) describes barriers of communication.
(d) Interpersonal communication
7. Identify the conjunctions and prepositions
3. Read the sentence given below and select
from the below list:
the true statements.
over, because, under, and, since, in, at,
I saw it with my own eyes.
although, or, up, on, beside
(I) The given sentence is an assertive
sentence. (a) Conjunction: over, under, and, in, at,
although, up, on, beside
(II) The given sentence is an imperative
sentence. Preposition: or, because, since
(III) ‘own’ is an adjective here. (b) Conjunction: because, and, since,
(IV) ‘own’ is an adverb here. although, or
(a) (I) and (III) are true Preposition: over, under, in, at, up, on,
beside
(b) (II) and (IV) are true
(d) All statements are true (c) Conjunction: Because, since, in, up, on
(d) All statements are false preposition: over, under, and, at,
although, or , beside
4. Election campaigns are the most common (d) Conjunction: because, under, and, since,
examples of interpersonal communication.
although, or, beside
Which of the following is not a type of Inter
personal communication? Preposition: over, in, at, up, on

High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Communication Skills - II 1
 Question No. 8 to 10 consist of two statements of cleanliness. What is this type of
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these communication called?
questions selecting the appropriate option given:
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
correct explanation of (A).
12. Compare verbal and non-verbal commu-
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the nications in terms of their drawbacks.
correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. 13. How would you define feedback, and what
significance does it hold in communication?
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
14. Ishaan went to Japan for a study exchange
8. Assertion (A): To communicate effectively in program. Although he learnt Japanese but
written form, it is important to wasn’t very fluent. Many a times he was
form the write-up effectively. misinterpreted by his classmates. Once he
Reason (R): Marks of punctuation and went to his friend’s house and was very
capitalisation help readers annoyed when he was asked to leave his
interpret sentences better. shoes outside. Identify and define the types
of communication barriers experienced by
9. Assertion (A): A complete message delivers Ishaan.
everything to the audience as
intended.
Long Qs 4 marks
Reason (R): A complete message
is important for the 15. In the realm of effective communication,
communication to be drafting a well-structured message is
effective. paramount. What guidelines should
communicators adhere to when formulating
10. Assertion (A): “Your story is interesting”. their messages to ensure clarity and
This is an example of non- efficacy?
specific feedback.
Reason (R): It says everything about the
16. Kayaan needs to write feedback about
interns of his company. Describe the key
communicated message by
considerations Kayaan should bear in mind
giving a general overview.
when providing feedback to interns at his
company to ensure its effectiveness.
Case Based Qs 4 marks
17. Imagine you are the manager of a
11. Lovely Public School has organised a hygiene multinational company tasked with
awareness camp in the city. For this they have introducing a new company policy to
divided the volunteers in five groups. A teacher your employees. Describe how you would
was made in-charge of each group who navigate the communication process,
instructed the volunteers on how and what considering the roles of the sender, receiver,
had to be done. Every group had to report the and communication channel. Begin by
feedback of the drive to the convener of the outlining how you, as the sender, would
camp. On completion of the camp it was found craft the message to ensure clarity and
that while one group got excellent response effectiveness. Then, discuss the importance
and cooperation from the citizens other groups of understanding your employees'
weren’t able to even deliver their idea to the perspectives as receivers and adapting your
residents. communication style accordingly. Finally,
explain your choice of communication
(A) What do you think could be the reason
channel and how it aligns with the
for the difference in the responses for
company's culture and the preferences of
different groups although the same your diverse workforce.
instructions were given to each group?
(B) What was the importance of the 18. Kratika is organising a school event, and
feedback? effective communication is crucial for its
success. Describe two scenarios where
(C) Suggest some ways that the groups can
she need to communicate important
use to communicate their message of
information to her classmates and teachers.
hygiene.
For each scenario, explain whether verbal
(D) At many places in the city students put or visual communication methods would be
up some sign boards to spread message more appropriate and why. Consider factors

2 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 such as the clarity of the message, audience to ensure that her chosen communication
engagement, and ease of understanding. method effectively conveys the intended
Finally, outline the steps she would take message.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

(V) Standing straight
Objective Qs 1 mark
(VI) Yawning while listening
19. What does an upright (straight) body (VII) Sitting straight
posture convey or show? (VIII) Maintaining eye contact while speaking
(a) Pride (b) Professionalism (IX) Biting nails
(c) Confidence (d) Humility (X) Firm Handshake
20. Which of these is NOT an appropriate non- (XI) Clenching jaws
verbal communication at work? (XII) Looking away when someone is
(a) Keeping hands in pocket while talking speaking to you
(b) Talking at moderate speed
(XIII) Intense stare
(c) Sitting straight
(d) Tilting head a bit to listen (a) (I), (II), (IV), (VI), (XI)
(b) (I), (II), (VI), (IX), (XI), (XII), (XIII)
21. Which of the following statement is true (c) (II), (III), (V), (VII), (IX), (XI), (XII)
about communication?
(d) All of these
(a) 50% of our communication is non-verbal
(b) 20% communication is done using body 26. Which of these are examples of positive
movements, face, arms, etc. feedback?
(c) 5% communication is done using voice, (a) Excellent, your work has improved.
tone, pauses, etc. (b) I didn’t notice your dedication towards
(d) 7% communication is done using words the project.
22. Which of the following is an example of oral (c) You are always doing it the wrong way.
communication? (d) All of the above
(a) Newspapers (b) Letters 27. Which of these are examples of negative
(c) Phone call (d) E-mail feedback?
23. Which of the following are effective (a) I hate to tell you this but your drawing
components of a good feedback? skills are poor.
(I) Detailed and time consuming (b) You can surely improve your drawing.
(II) Direct and honest (c) This is a good drawing but you can do
(III) Specific better.
(III) Opinion-based (d) None of the above
(a) (I), (II), (IV) (b) (II), (III) 28. What are the types of words we should use
(c) (II), (III), (IV) (d) Only (IV) for verbal communication?
24. Which of these is a positive (good) facial (a) Acronyms (b) Simple
expression? (c) Technical (d) Jargons
(a) Frowning while concentrating 29. Which of these are ways to overcome
(b) Maintaining eye contact communication barriers?
(c) Smiling continuously (a) Neglecting each other’s differences
(d) Rolling up your eyes (b) Using a translator
25. Select the options which are examples of (c) Not communicating at all
bad non-verbal communication. (d) Using your own language for comfort
(I) Laughing during formal communication
30. Identify the indirect object in the sentence:
(II) Scratching head
‘The band played music for the audience.’
(III) Smiling when speaking to a friend
(a) The band (b) played
(IV) Nodding when you agree with
something (c) music (d) audience

Communication Skills - II 3
 31. In which of these sentences you can find an 35. Which of these is an imperative sentence?
adverb? (a) Switch off the fan.
(a) Divya drinks milk every day. (b) Sheila has gone to the market.
(b) Sanjay gifted me a new pen. (c) Where are my pen colours?
(c) I opened the door lock. (d) Oh no! I missed my flight.
(d) Sita is 5-feet tall.
36. Which of the following is NOT an element of
32. Which of these sentence(s) is in active voice? communication within the communication
(a) A movie is being watched by them. process cycle?
(b) The car was repaired by Raju. (a) Channel (b) Receiver
(c) He is reading a book. (c) Sender (d) Time
(d) The thief was being chased by a
policeman. Short Q 2 marks
33. Identify the object, verb and subject in the 37. Write two sentences for each of the following
sentence: types:
‘The car crashed into a tree.’ statement, question, exclamatory and order.
(a) Object: a tree; Verb: crashed; Subject: the
car Long Qs 4 marks
(b) Object: The car; Verb: crashed; Subject: a 38. List the different types of verbal
tree communication. Include examples for each
(c) Object: crashed; Verb: the tree; Subject: verbal communication type.
the car
39. What do you mean by feedback? Let’s
(d) Object: crashed; Verb: the car; Subject:
take a scenario. Radha is your co-worker.
the tree
Together you are making a report on how to
34. In which of the following, the underlined manage the waste in your store. Since she
word is an adjective? has not finished her part of the report on
time, the whole report has got delayed and
(a) Radha has a red dress.
the manager has given you both a warning.
(b) I can speak French. Write down the feedback you would like to
(c) The girl on the train is a best-seller. give your co-worker on managing time. Try
(d) Abdul can swim fast. to keep the feedback specific and polite.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

approval for the robotics class, which is going
Objective Qs 1 mark to start in his school next week onwards.
However, due to disruption in the phone line,
40. Which of the following type of his mother could not understand and reply
communication involves interchanging to him. He got very upset. Which another
messages only through images or pictures? medium can he use to get immediate
(a) Verbal (b) Gesture approval of his mother?
(c) Visual (d) Facial (a) E-mail
[CBSE 2024] (b) Letter
(c) Message through friend
41. When it is difficult to communicate with
someone who is not willing to talk or express (d) Fax
their feelings and views it means there is a/ [CBSE SQP 2019]
an ............... .
43. Use of abbreviations in a communication
(a) Culture Barrier leads to misinterpretation of messages is an
(b) Interpersonal Barrier example of ............... .
(c) Physical Barrier (a) Culture Barrier
(d) Language Barrier (b) Interpersonal Barrier
[CBSE SQP 2023] (c) Physical Barrier
42. Karan lives at a hostel in Shimla. He calls (d) Language Barrier
his mother who lives in Delhi, to get her [Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]

4 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 44. There are many reasons why interpersonal (c) Interpersonal barrier
communication may fail. While (d) Subjective barrier [CBSE 2020]
communicating, the message may not
be received exactly the way the sender Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
intended and therefore it is important that
the communicator seeks ............... to check 48. How can cultural differences be a barrier to
that their message is clearly understood.
effective communication?
(a) Description (b) Feedback
(c) Channel (d) Sign [CBSE 2024]
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
49. What are the learning objectives of
45. ............... feedback is specific information, communication? [CBSE SQP 2023]
in the form of written comments or
verbal conversations that help the learner 50. Communication skills are very important for
understand what she or he needs to do in any business. Explain any two elements of a
order to improve. communication process. [CBSE SQP 2021]
(a) Descriptive (b) Specific
51. Explain any two 7Cs of Communication.
(c) General (d) Sign
[CBSE Term-1 2021] [CBSE SQP 2020]

46. ............... communication is the use of body 52. What do you mean by visual communication?
language, gestures and facial expressions to [CBSE Compartment 2021]
convey information to others.
(a) Verbal (b) Written 53. A stranger has helped your grandfather and
(c) Non-Verbal (d) Visual you want to appreciate him for the help
[CBSE Term–1 2021] extended by him. Write any three lines to
thank him. [CBSE SQP 2018]
47. Which one of the following is NOT a barrier
to effective communication? 54. You have recently visited a hill station.
(a) Physical barrier Describe it using appropriate phrases.
(b) Linguistic barrier [CBSE SQP 2018]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
3. During a project meeting, your team is
Objective Questions struggling with misunderstandings and
missed deadlines.
1. A group of words that gives just an idea
What approach will most likely improve
about what the message is trying to
communication within your team?
communicate is called:
(a) Sharing ideas without listening
(a) Phrase (b) Sentence
(b) Listening without speaking up
(c) Feedback (d) Clause 1
(c) Using both speaking and writing without
2. Which of the following statement(s) is a ensuring understanding
myth? (d) Speaking to share ideas and listening to
understand others 1
(a) Sometimes sender or receiver pose as
a communication barrier due to several 4. During a team-building workshop, the
factors present within them. facilitator highlights the importance of
(b) Lack of trust towards the sender of the various communication methods, including
message is also a communication barrier. non-verbal cues. Which of the following is a
form of non-verbal communication?
(c) Sometimes the receiver modifies or
(a) Written communication
distorts the actual message received
according to their own convenience. This (b) Email
is also a communication barrier. (c) Phone calls
(d) In the present age of internet, time and (d) Body language 1
distance are no longer communication Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements
barriers. 1 – Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these

Communication Skills - II 5
 questions selecting the appropriate option (C) What type of barrier was posed in
given: communication with the new client?
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the (D) Same client approaches the organisation
correct explanation of (A). but inspite of their whole hearted efforts
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the they are not able to convince him. Name
correct explanation of (A). the reason for this. 4
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. Short Questions
5. Assertion (A): Any communication needs 8. What are the characteristics of effective
to be planned in terms of feedback? 2
what, when, where, how and
whom to communicate. 9. What do you understand by coherent and
Reason (R): Without planning message to concise in 7C’s of communication? 2
be sent, the desired outcome
10. Which is your favourite food, dish or cuisine?
of the communication may
Write two paragraphs about your favourite
not be achieved. 1
food, dish or cuisine. Each paragraph should
6. Assertion (A): A formal feedback is have a minimum of five sentences. Make
spontaneously framed . sure you follow all the rules about sentences
Reason (R): A formal feedback follows a and paragraphs you have learnt. 2
preset format. 1
Long Questions
Case Based Questions
11. Neha and Ayush are working on a school
7. ABC Pvt. Ltd. is a consultancy startup with project together. However, they are facing
only five employees. They don’t have any challenges in communicating effectively.
predefined roles. They had a deadline to meet Neha is comfortable in English while Ayush
and also to attend an investors meet. No one in Hindi. Identify two barriers to effective
turned up for the meet and neither anyone communication they might be experiencing,
followed the deadline. Each of them thought and suggest strategies to overcome them. 4
that someone else will attend the meet. All of
them got annoyed with this. The next day they 12. Sara and Rohan are preparing for their
received a phone call from a new client, but school debate competition. They have
couldn’t communicate their work plans to him, practiced their arguments and are now
leading to loosing the client. seeking feedback from their teacher and
(A) What do you think was the reason for no classmates. Identify two types of feedback
one attending the meet? they could receive, and explain how each
(B) What type of communication barrier is type could help Sara and Rohan improve
it? their debating skills. 4

6 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a)
Key
1. (a) (I), (II), (IV)
Related Theory
Explanation: In sentences (III) and (V) underline
 The non-verbal mediums of communication such as
parts have subjects (chain and raining) so posters, signboards, placards are visual methods of
these are clause. communication.

Related Theory 5. (b) Body language

 A group of words that make a sense but not complete Explanation: Only about 7% of the
sense is a phrase. A group of words that form part of communication is done through words. 55%
a sentence and have a subject and predicate is called of the communication is done through our
a clause. body language, gestures and our posture and
rest 38% through the tone of our voice and the
2. (d) Interpersonal communication way we speak.
Explanation: Interpersonal communication
is face-to-face communication and is mostly 6. (b) describes requirements of effective
done verbally. But during a face-to–face communication.
communication the body language, posture Explanation: For effectiveness of the
and other such gestures are also very communication, it is essential that the
important for the effectiveness of the message message is understood by the receiver. For this
most important aspect is the language. If the
being delivered.
language of the message is not understood
3. (a) (I) and (III) are true by the receiver, then the whole process of
communication goes waste.
Explanation: Here the sentence in (I) is
describing a truth so it is an assertive sentence. 7. (b) Conjunction : because, and, since, although,
'own' describes the noun eyes so it is an or
adjective. Preposition : over, under, in, at, up, on,
beside
Related Theory Explanation: A conjunction is a word that joins
 An assertive sentence is the one which makes a two or more words or sentences.
declaration. An imperative sentence is the one which
Preposition is a word that shows position of
shows an order, command or request. A word that noun with respect to another noun.
describes a verb is called an adverb.
8. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
4. (a) Posters correct explanation of (A).
Explanation: Interpersonal communication Explanation: Written communication
is one in which receiver and sender interact involves communicating message through
with each other directly. It is mostly verbal written words. For effectiveness of the
or written. Posters are examples of visual written messages it is important that the
communication. message is composed properly. Since written

Communication Skills - II 7
 communication lacks face-to-face interaction (2) Without feedback sender cannot evaluate
the exact meaning of the message is conveyed the success of the communication.
only with the proper use of punctuations and
capitalisation. 14. The two communication barrier here are
linguistic and cultural.
9. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the Linguistic barrier is due to different languages
correct explanation of (A). of sender and receiver. This poses a hindrance
Explanation: For communication to be effective in effective communication.
it is important to convey the complete idea to Cultural barrier is due to difference in cultures
the audience. of the participants of communication.

10. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the 15. The guidelines that a communicator should
correct explanation of (A). follow while creating a message are known as
Explanation: A non-specific feedback gives a 7C’s of communication. These are:
general overview but doesn’t specifically about (1) Clear: The meaning of the message should
any point. be clear.
(2) Concise: The message should be specific.
11. (A) Difference in responses can be due to (3) Concrete: The message should state the
difference in the style of communicating correct and exact facts.
the messages. (4) Correct: The communication should be
(B) The feedback helped to understand the error free and in an audience friendly
effectiveness of the camp. language.
(C) Students can use posters, flyers and (5) Coherent: The communication should be
interpersonal means of communication. logical. The words, tone and flow of text
should be all connected.
(D) Visual communication
(6) Complete: The message should be
12. complete. It should deliver everything
Verbal Non-verbal
about the topic.
(1) Verbal commu- Non-verbal commu- (7) Courteous: The communication should be
nication requires nication is not suit- courteous i.e. it should be friendly, honest
the sender and able for lengthy mes- and polite.
receiver to be at sages.
the same place. 16. For a feedback to be effective it should have
the following characteristics:
(2) Hiding of true There are chances
emotions is not that the sender may (1) Intention: If the message is not received
possible. Speak- be misinterpreted. properly the feedback should be able to
er’s true emotions convey at least the purpose of the message
show up in verbal to the communicator.
communication. (2) Specific: The feedback should not be vague
and conveyed with clarity.
(3) Verbal commu- It also requires sup-
nication requires port from other forms (3) Fair: The feedback should only tell about
other forms of of communication for the success or failure of the communication
communication completion. and it should not be judgemental.
for completion. (4) Timeliness: The feedback should be
on-time. A delayed feedback kills the
(4) It’s not possible Various gestures have
effectiveness of communication.
to keep record of different meaning in
verbal communi- different cultures. (5) Useful: A good feedback should improve
cation. the overall communication
(6) Clarity: The feedback must be clear and
13. The last step in the communication cycle is the understandable.
feedback. It is an intimation to the sender that
the message has been received and also tells 17. As the manager of a multinational company,
the sender that how the message has been introducing a new company policy requires
careful communication planning. Firstly, as
understood.
the sender, I would craft a clear and concise
The feedback is important because: message outlining the rationale behind the
(1) It tells the sender about the effectiveness policy change, its benefits, and the expected
of the communication. impact on employees. To ensure clarity and

8 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 transparency and avoid misunderstandings associates need to be informed. This can
and resistance. be done by making announcements during
To understand diverse perspectives of assembly, class breaks or personally
employees as receivers. I would take into approaching the house coordinators and
account factors such as cultural backgrounds, also by putting up notices and posters at
job roles, and communication preferences. prominent areas around the school campus.
I would utilize a combination of channels
such as company-wide emails, intranet (2) Another scenario in the event organisation
announcements, and in-person meetings or can be communicating to the students
webinars to reach all employees effectively about the important who's who of the
across different geographical locations and event so that the interested ones can
make them feel included.
contact them to make the vent a success.
18. While organising the school events proper This cna be communicated by making
communication is very important. The two regular announcements during assembly
scenarios where good communication is and class breaks or by sending messages
crucial for the success of the event are: in the class whatsapp groups, so that
(1) Informing about the event and its purpose. iformation is always handy for every
All the students, staff and other school student.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

Answer 19. (c) 20. (a) 21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (b)
Key 29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d)

19. (c) Confidence of meaning and understanding is conveyed

through non-verbal cues and vocal elements.
Related Theory
22. (c) Phone call
 Posture shows our confidence and feelings. When
a person stands or sits up straight, it indicates self Explanation: The style of communication
assurance, assertiveness, and readiness to take on in which most of the communication is
challenges. done through spoken words is called oral
communication. Newspapers, letters and
20. (a) Keeping hands in pocket while talking e-mail all are written communication methods.
Explanation: Keeping hands in pocket while
talking shows our disinterest and gives a Related Theory
negative impression. Using right postures and  Oral communication relies on factors such as tone
of voice, intonation, and clarity of speech to convey
gestures makes our message more effective.
meaning and establish understanding between
communicators. Face to face communication,
Related Theory
communication in small groups, communication
 Gestures and Postures play a vital role in verbal
through digital address systems such as podcast and
communication. Much part of the communication
public address all are forms of oral communication.
is done using gestures. positive gestures are very
important for effective communication whereas 23. (c) (II), (III), (IV)
negative gestures make even a very well delivered or
Explanation: Detailed and time-consuming
framed communication worthless
feedback may not always be effective, as
21. (d) 7% communication is done using words it can overwhelm the recipient or delay the
communication process unnecessarily.
Explanation: This statement refers to the
famous "7-38-55 rule," often attributed to 24. (b) Maintaining eye contact
Albert Mehrabian's research on communication. Explanation: Maintaining eye contact is
According to this rule, communication is considered a positive facial expression because
composed of 7% verbal (words), 38% vocal it demonstrates attentiveness, engagement,
(tone of voice, pitch, speed), and 55% non- and interest in the conversation. It shows that
verbal (body language, facial expressions) you are actively listening and involved in the
components. Therefore, while words play a interaction, which can foster trust and rapport
role in communication, a significant portion between individuals.

Communication Skills - II 9
 25. (b) (I), (II), (VI), (IX), (XI), (XII), (XIII) 32. (c) He is reading a book.
Explanation: In this sentence, the subject
Related Theory ("He") performs the action ("reading"), which is
 The factors that constitute non-verbal communication characteristic of active voice sentences.
are called body language. This include voice or para-
linguistics, eye contact, postures and gestures, facial 33. (a) Object: a tree; Verb: crashed; Subject: the
expression and physical space or proxemics. These car
non-verbal cues can convey emotions, attitudes, Explanation: The subject is the entity
intentions, and relational dynamics, influencing the performing the action (the car), the verb is the
interpretation and reception of messages. action itself (crashed), and the object is the
entity that receives the action (the tree).
26. (a) Excellent, your work has improved.
34. (a) Radha has a red dress.
Related Theory Explanation: A word that describes a noun
 A Positive feedback is always specific, kind and or a pronoun is called an adjective. Here red
helpful. describes the dress so it’s an adjective.

27. (a) I hate to tell you this but your drawing 35. (a) Switch off the fan.
skills are poor. Explanation: An imperative sentence expresses
a command, request, instruction or an advice.
Related Theory 36. (d) Time
 A feedback helps to complete the communication
Explanation: The communication process
and also enables one to evaluate the effectiveness
cycle consists of the following elements sender,
of the message.
ideas, encoding, communication channel,
28. (b) Simple receiver, decoding and feedback.
Explanation: The words used in oral Related Theory
communication should be such that the receiver
 In a communication process the message originates
is able to clearly and easily comprehend the at the sender’s end and reaches the receiver’s end
intended message. through a communication channel.

29. (b) Using a translator 37. Statement:

Explanation: Ways to Overcome Barriers to (1) This is a pen.
Effective Communication: (2) Karishma is a good girl.
(1) Use simple language. Question:
(2) Do not form assumptions on culture, (3) Where were you?
religion or geography. (4) Why are you not coming?
(3) Try to communicate in person as much as Exclamatory:
possible. (1) Oh No! We lost the match again.
(4) Use visuals. (2) Wow! What a beautiful painting.
(5) Take help of a translator to overcome Order:
differences in language. (1) Get out of the class.
(6) Be respectful of other’s opinions. (2) Shut the door.

30. (d) audience 38. Verbal communication has two forms:

Interpersonal and written.
Related Theory Interpersonal communication is the easiest
 An indirect object is a person or thing for or to which and most effective way of communication. It
an action is done. occurs face-to-face and the words are spoken.
e. g., A teacher teaching in the class.
31. (a) Divya drinks milk every day. Written communication is in the form of written
words and is mostly formal. It includes letters,
Related Theory applications, newspapers, reports and emails
 An adverb is a word that describes a verb or an etc. The written communication needs to be to
adjective. The adverb in this sentence is "every day," the point and precise in order for the message
which modifies the verb "drinks" by indicating the to be understood clearly e. g., An application
frequency of the action. These type of adverbs are written to the class teacher giving reasons for
called adverbs of frequency. being absent during the examination.

10 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 Related Theory

Type of Verbal Communication Examples

Interpersonal Communication This form of communication takes place between

two individuals and is thus a one-on-one
conversation. It can be formal or informal.
Examples:
(1) A manager discussing the performance with
an employee.
(2) Two friends discussing homework.
(3) Two people talking to each other over phone
or video call.

Written Communication This form of communication involves writing

words. It can be letters, circulars, reports, manuals,
SMS, social media chats, etc. It can be between
two or more people.
Examples:
(1) A manager writing an appreciation e-mail to
an employee.
(2) Writing a letter to grandmother enquiring
about health.

Small Group Communication This type of communication takes place when

there are more than two people involved. Each
participant can interact and converse with the
rest.
Examples:
(1) Press conferences
(2) Board meetings
(3) Team meetings

Public Communication This type of communication takes place when one

individual addresses a large gathering.
Examples:
(1) Election campaigns
(2) Public speeches by dignitaries

39. Feedback is the receiver’s response to the personal and professional commitments. Your
sender’s message. professional abilities are better than most of
us but I think you need to work on setting your
Feedback: I know that you have been working priorities and try managing your time better
very hard for past few days to complete so that we are able to meet our next deadline
the report along with managing your other that is two days after tomorrow.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Answer 40. (c) 41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (d)
Key
40. (c) Visual charts, screen shots, screen recordings etc. it
Explanation: Visual communication involves may include paper handouts, memos, slide
use of graphics to convey information. Some presentations etc.
examples of visual communication are videos, 41. (b) Interpersonal Barrier

Communication Skills - II 11
 Explanation: Interpersonal communication methods of communication. This includes tone
barriers are obstacles that hinder of voice, kinesics, eye contact, posture etc.
effective exchange of information and
understanding between individuals. These 47. (d) Subjective barrier
can include language differences, cultural Explanation: Many a times the message
misunderstandings, emotional barriers, or as communicated by the sender is not
physical distractions, all of which impair the perceived in the same way by the receiver.
smooth flow of communication in interpersonal This hinders effective communication. There
interactions. are many factors that prove to be barriers
in communication. These include linguistic,
Related Theory physical, cultural, inter-personal and
 A physical barrier in communication refers to organisational barriers.
obstacles that arise from the environment or the
surroundings, hindering the effective exchange of 48. Cultural barriers arise due to lack of similarities
information between individuals. Examples include among the different cultures. On the basis of
distance, noise, poor lighting, or any tangible factors their cultural background, people occasionally
that create difficulties in transmitting or receiving assume things about others that are
messages. stereotyped. Also cultural differences in values,
beliefs, traditions, and social norms are also
42. (a) Email
responsible for how messages are understood
Explanation: Since Karan wants an immediate and interpreted by people. Lack of awareness
approval from his mother, he must use any of these differences can become a barrier in
medium that transmits message quickly. He effective communication.
can not use fax as for that he needs fax device.
Letter would take three to four days to reach 49. Learning objectives of effective communication
his mother. Only email is the method that is are:
quick and easiest. (1) Sending, receiving and understanding the
message or information effectively .
43. (d) Language Barrier (2) Development of inter personal skills to
Explanation: The abbreviations may be communicate efficiently in various contexts.
interpreted differently by different people. (3) Expressing oneself effectively with
e.g. cc corresponds to cubic centimetre in maximum clarity and impact.
measurements and carbon copy in terms of
email. 50. Communication process starts form the sender
and completes once the message reaches the
44. (b) Feedback receiver. The message travels through the
Explanation: Feedback is important to communication channel.
complete the communication cycle. It ensures (1) Sender: The initiator of the message is the
that the receiver has received and interpreted sender or the messenger.
the message as intended by the sender. (2) Message: The message or the idea that is
being communicated is the most important
Caution constituent of the communication process.
 No feedback is also a type of feedback that shows It can be in verbal, non-verbal or written
that the receiver doesn’t agree with the point of view
form.
of the sender.
(3) Encoding: Forming the message so as to
45. (a) Descriptive be able to convey the ideas effectively is
called encoding.
Related Theory (4) Communication channel: The medium
 Feedback can be of various forms depending upon of communication or the carrier that is
the type of communication. It helps to make the
communication effective and successful. A feedback
used to transmit the message is called the
can be descriptive or non-descriptive. A Non communication channel. Air is the medium
descriptive feedback provides specific information but for verbal messages and internet is the
does not include any details. Descriptive feedback medium for e-mail messages.
on the other hand provides specific information
(5) Receiver: The person for whom the
including a detailed analysis or suggestions.
message is intended is the receiver. The
46. (c) Non-verbal comprehension of the idea by the receiver
Explanation: The factors that do not use words terminates the communication process.
to communicate are known as non-verbal (Any two)

12 One Shot Information Technology Class X

51. The 7Cs of communication provide a checklist many points or been distracted by side
for making sure that the meetings, emails, issues.
conference calls, reports, and presentations (6) Be Complete: Your message must contain
are well constructed and clear so that the all the necessary information to achieve
audience gets your message. the desired response.
(1) Be Clear: It is important that you clearly (7) Be Courteous: Be polite. Check that your
communicate the intended information to message is polite, shows respect for the
the recipient. Clarity is also about avoiding feelings of the receiver, and is tactful.
the use of complex words, sentences, (Any two)
and fuzzy language. You must be able to
explain a concept several ways and answer 52. Visual communication is the process of using
clarifying questions about the topic. visual elements to convey ideas, information,
(2) Be concise: Make your message brief and and data. Visual elements can encompass
to the point. Avoid the use of filler words, photos, videos, graphs, typography, charts,
sentences, and over wordy expressions. maps, illustrations, and so much more.
(3) Be Concrete: Concrete communication is 53. Thanks a lot!
about being specific and clear rather than
Thanks! for helping my grandfather.
vague, obscure, and general. Use sentences
Thanks! I really appreciate your help.
that cannot be misinterpreted, include
supporting facts and figures to underscore Thanks a lot! I am highly grateful for the timely
your message. help extended by you. (Any three)
(4) Be Correct: Ensure that: Your message 54. Recently I visited Manali a beautiful hill
is typo-free; your facts and figures are station in the Himalayas. It’s a beautiful place
correct and you are using the right level of in the mountain state of Himachal Pradesh.
language. A correct message will also have The serpent road to Manali is bordered with
a greater impact on the recipient than an conifers and apple orchards. The snow covered
incorrect one. Himalayan peaks present a serene view. As
(5) Be Coherent: Check that each sentence one ascends the mountains the closeness to
flows logically from one to the next and nature fills hearts with peace and we can feel
check that you haven’t tried to cover too harmony with nature.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

Communication Skills - II 13
 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
4. When one knows how other people assess or
Objective Qs 1 mark value them it is called ............... .
1. Identify the effects of stress from the (a) self-discipline
following: (b) internal self-awareness
Anxiety, fatigue, increased productivity, (c) external self-awareness
chest pain, upset stomach, increased (d) self-motivation
chances of bigger achievements
5. Prioritisation, time allocation and discipline
(a) Anxiety, fatigue, increased productivity,
all help in ............... .
chest pain, upset stomach, increased
(a) self-discipline
chances of bigger achievements
(b) stress management
(b) Anxiety, fatigue, chest pain, upset
(c) working independently
stomach
(c) increased productivity, increased (d) time management
chances of bigger achievements 6. A do-or-die situation that generates a
(d) Anxiety, fatigue, increased productivity, similar response in human beings and
chest pain, increased chances of bigger animals causes ............... .
achievements (a) Survival stress
2. During a seminar on personal development, (b) Internal stress
the speaker discusses the factors contributing (c) Environmental stress
to self-motivation and self-control. What (d) Fatigue
fundamental source contributes significantly
to both self-motivation and self-control?
7. Siddhant is a very sincere boy who always
helps his parents at home and teachers and
(a) Eustress
(b) Being punctual friends at school. He never waits for anyone
(c) Healthy body to tell him what to do. He himself looks for
(d) Self-awareness what he can do to help others. We can say
Siddhant is ............... .
3. Identify the habits from the following that (a) an over smart boy
help us reduce stress. (b) hyper active child
(I) Procrastination (c) having ability to work independently
(II) Seven hours of good sleep (d) self-aware boy
(III) Binge watching good shows on youtube
and OTT 8. Uncluttering or decluttering mind is one
(IV) Meditation of the most important technique for stress
(VI) Always be there for everyone come management. Select the statement which
what may best describes the ways for decluttering.
(VI) Stick to your schedule and timelines (a) Thought stopping
(VII) Spend quality time with friends and (b) Ignoring everything
family (c) Focusing on the problem
(a) (I), (II), (IV), (V), (VI), (VII) (d) Feeding yourself on eustress
(b) (II), (IV), (VI), (VII)
(c) (I), (II), (III), (V), (VII) 9. Select the statement which is not a way to
(d) (II), (IV), (VI) identify the stress.
High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

14 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (a) Find out the symptoms and signs of our 15. Assertion (A): Positive outlook means being
stress confident that whatever we
(b) Find the physical or mental signs of are doing is always right .
stress Reason (R): Positive outlook causes
(c) Finding our personal signs of stress distress.
(d) Doing physical exercise
16. Assertion (A): Knowing our strengths and
10. Anubhav always wanted to become a weaknesses is important.
surgeon. After class 10th he decided to Reason(R): Self-aware people develop
start preparing for medical entrance and mindfulness abilities to
dedicated himself towards his goal. We can improve themselves turn
say Anubhav is a: into a better individual and
(a) self-regulated person leaders.
(b) self-motivated person
(c) self-aware person
(d) independent person Case Based Qs 4 marks
11. Identify the statement that best describes 17. Anubhav is an ambitious student. He is
self-regulation. undergoing his graduation. To increase his skill
(a) Being able to turn your thoughts into set he has also joined some online courses.
action. He scored very well in his entrance exams
(b) Being able to identify your skill set, and at college also his mentors appreciate
interests, career path. him a lot. He gets many accolades and loves
(c) Systematic efforts to direct one’s to talk about these to his friends and family.
thoughts, feelings and actions towards As his project submission dates approach his
the attainment of one’s goals. appetite reduces and he feels more and more
(d) All of these. distracted. He studies for long hours at night.
Question No. 12 to 16 consist of two statements Due to this he is unable to wake up on time
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these for his college classes. He feels lethargic whole
questions selecting the appropriate option given: day and low in mood.
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the (A) Write down one symptom of distress in
correct explanation of (A). Anubhav.
(B) Give one word for the condition where he
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A). loves to talk about his accomplishments.
(C) His mother took him to a doctor and
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
doctor prescribed him jogging and
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. meditation for at least one hour daily
12. Assertion(A): Many a times people when instead of medicine. How will this help
get on to stage, they forget Anubhav?
everything and stand blank. (D) What should Anubhav do to avoid
Reason (R) : Our body triggers the freeze distractions and be able to study long
response as it is unable to hours? Suggest one measure.
deal with an impending
situation or put forth a fight
18. Tishya is a multitasker. She is able to handle
or flight response. multiple tasks and finish them on time. Everyone
praises her for this. She takes initiatives and
13. Assertion (A): Multitasking is the ability to always makes sure that she stays in the task
handle multiple tasks, being till it finishes. She is always ready to take help
able to prioritize according for the tasks that she does not know how to
to the change in situation do. She loves feedbacks and accepts them
and completing all of them whole heartedly. She energetically handles
successfully. emergency situations.
Reason (R) : Multitasking is not at all (A) Name the technique that helps Tishya to
required for an individual to do multitasking.
work independently. (B) Taking initiatives shows which character
14. Assertion (A): Goal setting refers to the trait of Tishya.
process of planning and (C) How does accepting feedbacks and
acting accordingly to achieve working over them helps Tishya.
a specific goal. (D) Identify a quality mentioned, that
Reason (R): Chosen goal should be classifies Tishya as a self-regulated
SMART. person.

Self - Management Skills - II 15

Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
23. You are tasked with choosing extracurricular
activities for the upcoming academic year.
19. Imagine you are a student preparing for your How would you distinguish between your
final exams. Describe how being self-aware interests and capabilities to make the best
selection?
can help you manage your study schedule
effectively and achieve better results. 24. You are part of student council which
organising a stress management workshop
20. Sudha’s neighbours always host late night for your classmates. Describe the concept of
parties at their home. They play loud music the ABC of stress management introduced
and have a lot of friends who join them. during the workshop so as to ensure
Every evening, Sudha tries to prepare herself everyone understands its significance and
for the late night disturbances. Identify the application in daily life.
type of stress and define it. List one measure
to overcome it. Long Qs 4 marks
21. You are part of a school project team tasked 25. What is fight or flight response? Explain
with organising a charity event. Explain how giving examples.
being self-motivated and self-regulated can
26. Discuss any five traits of self–motivated
contribute to the success of the project. people.
22. If you want to become an active member of 27. What is emotional intelligence? How can
a team what abilities you should have? one develop emotional intelligence?

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

Objective Qs 1 mark Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks

28. What makes you complete work or studies 31. Describe stress and stress management in
without others cheering you? your own words.
(a) Self-confidence (b) Communication
32. List your favourite stress management
(c) Self-motivation (d) Self-esteem
technique and elaborate why you find it the
29. Which of the following are types of most effective.
motivation? 33. What is Goal Setting?
(I) Internal (II) Intermediate
(III) External (IV) Extensive 34. In SMART goals, what does ‘S’ stand for?
(a) (I), (III) (b) (I), (II), (III) Explain
(c) (II), (IV) (d) (I), (II), (IV) 35. What is the best way to work on long-term
goals?
30. Ravi works hard to get the best student
award at the end of year. What type of 36. How can tracking your time help you?
motivation is this?
(a) Internal Long Q 4 marks
(b) External
(c) Both internal and external 37. What is time management and how can you
(d) Not any specific type of motivation manage your time?

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

(c) Self-growth
Objective Qs 1 mark
(d) Self-motivation [CBSE 2024]
38. ................... is the driving force that pushes us 39. ................... is the ability to identify and
to achieve our goals, feel happy and improve
manage one's own emotions, as well as the
our quality of life.
emotions of others.
(a) Stress management (a) Self-awareness
(b) Self-awareness (b) Emotional Intelligence

16 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (c) Stress Management (a) Yoga
(d) Emotional Barrier [CBSE 2024] (b) Exercise
(c) Vacation with Family
40. .................. refers to focusing human efforts (d) All of these [CBSE SQP 2020]
for maintaining a healthy body and mind
capable of better withstanding stressful 48. ............... is the ability of a person to do
the things that need to be done without
situations.
someone or something influencing us.
(a) Self-Motivation
(a) Self-motivation
(b) Stress Management
(c) Self-Awareness (b) Self awareness
(d) Self-Regulation [CBSE SQP 2023] (c) Self discipline
(d) Self-regulation
41. High expectations from self can leave with [CBSE SQP 2020]
chronic anxiety and stress, thus leading to
............... stress. 49. Sonika gets up at 6 am and goes for her
(a) physical (b) emotional hobby classes. Then she comes back home
(c) mental (d) financial and finishes her homework before going to
school. She does all work by herself. No one
[CBSE SQP 2023]
tells her to do so. This is called ............... .
42. ............... is a series of postures and breathing (a) self-awareness
exercises practiced to achieve control of (b) self-motivation
body and mind. (c) self-regulation
(a) Meditation (b) Nature Walk (d) discipline
(c) Yoga (d) Physical Exercise [CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
[CBSE SQP 2022]
50. High expectations from self can leave one
43. ............... is not the quality of self-confident with chronic anxiety and stress, thus leading
people.
to .............. stress.
(a) Dependent (b) Hard Working
(a) Physical (b) Emotional
(c) Positive Attitude (d) Commitment
(c) Mental (d) Financial
[CBSE SQP 2023] [CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
44. Which of the following is not the benefit of 51. Vacationing helps in ............... individuals.
stress management? (a) motivating (b) energising
(a) Boosts immunity
(c) creating stress (d) destressing
(b) Reduces efficiency
[Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]
(c) Improves mood
(d) Prevents behavioural problems 52. Physical exercise in the form of ............... to
[CBSE 2023] relieve stress as they stabilize mood, improve
self-esteem and induce sleep.
45. Having conscious knowledge of your own
(a) Eating, working hard
self, capabilities, feelings and one’s own
(b) House hold chores, extra homework
character is called as ...................... .
(c) Walking, skipping
(a) self-awareness
(d) All of these
(b) self-regulation
[Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]
(c) self-motivation
(d) internal stress [Mod. CBSE 2020] 53. To perform well at work and life in general,
you must be able to manage and improve
46. Neha works hard to get the best student
award at the end of the year. What type of yourself in various skills. Which of the
motivation is this? following skills helps you to prioritise the
(a) Internal things you have to do remove waste and
(b) External redundancy from work?
(c) Both (Internal & External) (a) Responsibility (b) Time management
(d) None of the above (c) Self-awareness (d) Adaptability
[CBSE Compartment 2021] [CBSE Term–1 2021]

47. Trisha is always tense during exam time. 54. Managing stress is about making a plan
She is a sincere and studious student, but to be able to cope effectively with daily
the thought of exams creates anxiety in her. pressures. Always keep in mind the ABC
Which stress management technique you of stress management. The acronym ABC
would suggest to help her? stands for:

Self - Management Skills - II 17

 (a) Ability, Burden, Concise 58. Name the stress causal agents.
(b) Adore, Belief, Cause [CBSE SQP 2023]
(c) Adversity, Beliefs, Consequences
59. What is self-awareness? Also give any two
(d) Adapt, Balance, Cooperate
benefits of self-awareness.
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
[CBSE 2023]
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks 60. Give one example each of following stress
causal agents for students:
55. Briefly discuss the significance of time (A) Mental (B) Social
management skills in order to succeed in life.
[CBSE 2023]
[CBSE 2024]
61. List any two factors that affect self-
56. How is self-regulation connected to the confidence.
ability to work independently? [CBSE 2020]
[CBSE SQP 2023] 62. Goal setting is a very essential factor in your
57. What are the advantages of the ability to personal life. List all the SMART methods to
work independently? set the goals. Explain ‘A’ in brief.
[CBSE 2023] [CBSE SQP 2020]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
(a) Self –awareness
Objective Questions (b) Interests
1. Identify the stressors from the following (c) Endorphin hormone
(I) An upcoming examination (d) Internal motivation 1
(II) Organising a social gathering Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements
(III) Taking a nature walk – Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
(IV) Taking a roller coaster ride questions selecting the appropriate option given:
(V) Going on vacations (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
(VI) Adapting to weather conditions when correct explanation of (A).
moving to a different country (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
(VII) Switching of school or work place correct explanation of (A).
(VIII) Watching a movie
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(a) (I),(II),(IV),(VI),(VII) (b) (I),(II),(III),(IV),(V)
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
(c) (II),(III),(V),(VIII) (d) (III),(V),(VIII) 1
5. Assertion(A): It is very important to strike
2. Which of the following is the characteristic of a work-life-relationships
a person who can work independently?
balance.
(a) Blames others for the mistakes
Reason (R): Making a plan helps to deal
(b) Takes initiatives
with daily stress triggers and
(c) Is resilient to feedbacks
face the challenges and daily
(d) Doesn’t know his drawbacks 1
pressures. 1
3. Shikha is trying to find answer to the 6. Assertion (A): When there is very less social
following questions:
interaction we get fatigue
(I) What are the things that she always
related stress.
excels in?
Reason (R) : Relaxation and vacationing
(II) What is others, opinion about her?
can reduce fatigue related
(III) What are the things that she is unable to
stress. 1
do?
By doing this she is trying to be
(a) Self-discipline Case Based Questions
(b) Independent
7. Anuj loves to sing. He has great passion for
(c) Self-aware
music and wanted to make it his career. His
(d) Able to manage stress 1
father wanted him to become an engineer,
4. We love to do certain things because they so he took it up as career but didn’t find it
make us happy, healthy and feel good. This interesting though he passed the exams with
is because of: flying colours.

18 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (A) In the light of the above scenario, identify and also spends quality time with family
the interests and capabilities of Anuj. and friends while some other person in the
(B) When Anuj joined engineering, he always same work scenario is always annoyed,
felt low in energy and lost weight. What doesn’t get time for his family and is always
could be the reason for it? low in energy? Why according to you is this
difference? Give two reasons. 2
(C) What should he do to overcome this
situation? 9. How can we manage our emotional
(D) Later in life Anuj used social media intelligence? 2
platforms to fulfil his dream of being
a singer. What worked behind his 10. Why is it important to set a goal in our
personal life? 2
achievement? 4

Short Questions Long Questions

8. In today’s competitive world, stress is a 11. List some qualities which help us to succeed
in life. 4
reality and everyone has to face it. How is
it possible that one person is always able to 12. What are some effective steps of time
complete his work on time, is always happy management? 4

Self - Management Skills - II 19

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b)
Key 11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (a)

1. (a) Anxiety, fatigue, increased productivity, evaluate you. This awareness helps individuals
chest pain, upset stomach, increased gain insights into how their behaviour and
chances of bigger achievements actions are perceived by others, enabling them
Explanation: Stress can be negative or positive. to adjust their interactions and improve their
Negative stress is called distress and can cause relationships.
physical changes such as headache, muscular
tension, fatigue, low energy, upset stomach 5. (d) time management
and psychological changes such as anxiety, Explanation: Time management involves
tension, loss of attention, angry outbursts prioritising tasks, allocating time for each task,
and social withdrawal. Positive stress called and exercising self-discipline to ensure that
eustress can cause increase in productivity time is used effectively and efficiently.
and also increase the chances of bigger
achievements. 6. (a) Survival stress
Explanation: A do-or-die situation is the one
2. (d) Self-awareness
which puts someone in a danger of immediate
Explanation: Self-awareness refers to
harm. Such situations ignite a fight or flight
understanding oneself, including one's
response alike in human beings and animals.
strengths, weaknesses, emotions, and
motivations. In response to such survival stress the adrenal
gland surge for hormonal secretions like
Related Theory adrenaline to give rush of energy for the fight
 Individuals with high levels of self-awareness are or flight response. An example of such situation
better equipped to manage stress, make informed is when another animal attacks an animal or
decisions, build positive relationships, and pursue when on our way back home on a dark night,
their goals with determination. we feel that someone is following us.
3. (b) (II), (IV), (VI), (VII) 7. (c) having ability to work independently
Explanation: Siddhant's behaviour of taking
Related Theory initiative and helping others without being
 Stress management, which involves adopting asked indicates that he is capable of working
strategies and habits to cope with and reduce stress
independently. This implies that he doesn't
levels effectively. This concept encompasses various
techniques, including sleep management, meditation,
require constant supervision or instruction to
time management, and maintaining healthy social accomplish tasks, demonstrating self-reliance
connections, all aimed at promoting overall well- and proactive behaviour.
being and resilience in the face of stressors.
8. (a) Thought stopping
4. (c) external self-awareness Explanation: Thinking too much leads to
Explanation: External self-awareness refers a chain reaction of thoughts. By thought-
to understanding how others perceive and stopping one can focus on what’s important

20 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 and live life in the moment. Enjoying vacations 16. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
with family and friends also helps in thought- correct explanation of (A).
stopping and recharges our mind and body. Explanation: our strengths and weaknesses
is important, as self-awareness is crucial for
9. (d) Doing physical exercise personal and professional development.
Explanation: Doing physical exercise is a stress Self-aware individuals develop mindfulness
management technique. abilities to improve themselves, becoming
better individuals and leaders. This explanation
10. (b) Self-motivated person further emphasizes the importance of self-
Explanation: A self-motivated person knows awareness in fostering personal growth and
effective methods to turn his thoughts into leadership skills.
action.
17. (A) Loss of appetite
11. (c) systematic efforts to direct one’s (B) Eustress
thoughts, feelings and actions towards the (C) Physical exercise is one of the measures of
attainment of one’s goals. stress management.
Explanation: Self-regulation enables one (D) Anubhav should take small breaks in
to differentiate between appropriate and between his long study hours and try to
inappropriate behaviour and be able to think do some recreational activity during that
before reacting. It also helps to control negative break.
thoughts and impulses. 18. (A) Time management helps in multitasking.
12. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the (B) This shows that she is self-motivated.
(C) Accepting feedbacks and working on them
correct explanation of (A).
makes her, self-aware.
Explanation: Stage fright or experiencing a (D) She energetically handles emergency
blank mind on stage is a common occurrence, situations.
often attributed to the freeze response
triggered by the body when facing a daunting 19. Being self-aware helps in understanding your
situation like public speaking. The freeze strengths and weaknesses, allowing you to
response inhibits the ability to think clearly or plan your study schedule accordingly, prioritise
react, leading to the observed behaviour. tasks, and seek help when needed, leading to
better exam preparation and results.
13. (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
Explanation: Multitasking may not be 20. This type of stress is called environmental
essential for working independently, it can stress.
still be a valuable skill in various situations, Environmental stress is caused due to our
surroundings or things in our surroundings such
especially in today's fast-paced work
as noise, crowd, extreme climatic conditions,
environments. Multitasking allows individuals
noisy or annoying neighbours or classmates
to manage competing demands and
or demanding parents. Breathing exercises are
accomplish more tasks in a shorter amount
best way to deal with environmental stress.
of time, which can enhance productivity and
efficiency. 21. Being self-motivated means having the drive
and enthusiasm to take initiative and propel
14. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the the project forward. Self-regulation ensures
correct explanation of (A). efficient time management, task prioritisation,
and adaptability, leading to effective planning
Related Theory and execution. Together, these qualities foster
 SMART is an acronym that stands for Specific, teamwork, productivity, and resilience, crucial
Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, Time bound. For a for the success of the charity event.
goal to be reachable and clear it should be SMART.
Setting up SMART goals is key to success. 22. To become active member of a team:
(1) We should have good interpersonal skills.
15. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true. (2) We should be self -aware of our weaknesses
Explanation: Positive outlook means being and strengths.
confident that the outcome of any action or (3) We should also know the skill set of other
incident will always be the best. A positive team members.
outlook can cause distress if it leads to toxic (4) We must know about the stress triggers
positivity, which is when someone believes of other members and how to deal with
they must only be positive and ignores serious them.
problems or mental health issues. (Write any two or three as per the question.)

Self - Management Skills - II 21

 23. (3) are focused.
Interests Capabilities
(4) are keen learners
Interests refer to the Capabilities are the (5) consistently move towards their goal
activities that we skills that we have
(6) are optimists
enjoy doing. learnt.
(7) are able to cut negativity and nurture
Interests help us to Our capabilities keep positive energy (Any five )
do away with stress. us away from stress.
27. Ability of a person to understand one’s own as
24. The ABC technique involves identifying well as others emotions and feelings and act
adversity or stressful events, beliefs, and accordingly is called emotional intelligence.
consequences to understand and manage
To develop emotional intelligence we should
stress effectively.
be able to:
25. The response generated by our body in (1) Identify the deceptive and real emotions.
situations of survival stress is called fight or
(2) Understand someone’s emotional
flight response. For example in case of someone
trying to rob you on a lonely road you either condition and reasons behind it.
try to run away (flight) or pose resistant (fight) (3) Try to relate emotions, moods and triggers.
with all your might. Understand the mix of emotions and
26. Self-motivated people: words.
(1) believe in their ability to achieve goals. (4) Try to engage positive emotions and
(2) are self-aware. disengage useless emotions.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

Answer 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (b)
Key
28. (c) Self-motivation 32. (1) Physical exercise helps to achieve physical
Explanation: Self-motivation is what pushes fitness and overall health. It improves
us to achieve our goals, feel happy and improve blood circulation, regulates blood pressure,
our quality of life. In other words, it is our ability increases stamina, and helps to sleep
to do the things that need to be done without better. All these in turn reduce stress and
someone or something influencing us. improve our self-esteem.
(2) Yoga integrates the mind, body, and
Related Theory spirit through physical postures (asanas)
 Self-motivation is one of the basic skills required for
and controlled breathing techniques
self- management. Other being stress management,
self-awareness, setting goals and time management.
(pranayama).
(3) Nature walks help in thought-stopping and
29. (a) (I), (III) increasing social inclusion. This helps to
Explanation: Motivation could come from avoid burn-out and sleep better. It eases
inside or from outside. Internal motivation muscle tension and decreases mental
comes from factors like peace of mind, love, worries. (Any One)
joy, belongingness or even fear. External
motivation comes from factors such as 33. Planning and taking active steps towards
appreciation, punishment, rewards etc. achieving a target is called goal setting.

30. (b) External 34. ‘S’ in SMART goals refers to ‘Specific’ This
means that whatever goal we set should be
Related Theory specific. A specific goal answers six basic ‘W’
 Self-motivation is simply the force within you that questions like ‘What I want to do?’,‘ Why I want
drives you to do things. to do this?’, ‘Who is involved in it?’, ‘Where do
I start and finish?’, ‘When do I start?’, ‘Which
31. The repulsive response that our body produces means do I use?’.
to a situation or condition that may be external
or internal is termed as stress. 35. The best way to work on long-term goals
Stress management refers to the conscious efficiently is by:
efforts towards maintaining healthy mind and (1) Breaking them down into smaller,
body to withstand stressful situations. manageable tasks or milestones.

22 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (2) Setting specific and achievable short-term effective time management it is important to
objectives. allocate time for each task and prioritise the
(3) Regularly review and adjust your approach tasks according to their importance. For this we
that help you stay on track. need to follow the following four steps:
(1) Organise: This involves dividing the task
36. Tracking time helps us to know how much time into sub-tasks and plan out a time for it.
we have spent on our project. How much time
(2) Prioritise: This involves deciding the most
was wasted and what were the distractions.
urgent tasks from the list of tasks organised.
This helps us to decide how we can plan
(3) Control: This involves controlling the
further strategies.
carrying out of tasks and monitoring that
37. Scheduling our time so that we are able to they are completed .
handle multiple tasks and any emergency (4) Track Time: This involves tracking the
situation without any stress, calmly and time spent on each task and what are the
successfully is called time management. For distractions involved.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Answer 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b) 41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (b) 47. (d)
Key 48. (a) 49. (b) 50. (c) 51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (c)

38. (d) Self-motivation or emotional strain resulting from challenging

Explanation: Self-motivation is an entrepre- or adverse situations. It is the body's natural
neurial skill that involves having a strong sense response to perceived threats, often referred
of purpose, determination, and initiative to to as stressors. These stressors can be external,
pursue tasks or projects, even when faced with such as work pressures, relationship difficulties,
challenges. Self-motivated people often take financial problems, or environmental factors,
initiatives and have clear goals. as well as internal, like unrealistic expectations,
negative self-talk, or personal insecurities.
39. (b) Emotional intelligence
Explanation: Emotional intelligence is a type 42. (c) Yoga
of self-management skill which is used to Explanation: Yoga refers to the union of mind,
recognize, understand and manage one’s own body and soul. The asanas or the postures,
emotions and as well as emotions of others. breathing exercises or the pranayams, mudras
This skill can be learned and developed. It or hand gestures help to relieve stress and
includes three skills – emotional awareness, increase productivity.
harnessing emotions and managing emotions.
43. (a) Dependent
40. (b) Stress Management
Explanation: Stress management refers to
the set of techniques, strategies, and practices Related Theory
individuals employ to cope with and alleviate  Self-confident people have the ability to work
the negative effects of stress. This may include independently. They are committed, have a positive
making healthier lifestyle choices, engaging attitude, look for opportunities and are self-regulated.
in relaxation methods, and practicing time
management. 44. (b) Reduces efficiency
Explanation: Stress management removes
Related Theory the negative impact of stress on physical and
 Self-regulation refers to an individual’s ability to mental well-being which results in increased
control and manage their own thoughts, emotions, efficiency.
behaviors, and impulses in order to adapt to various
situations and achieve personal goals. 45. (a) Self -awareness
 Good stress or eustress inspires and motivates you
and enhances the performances whereas bad stress Related Theory
or distress can lead to anxiety, confusion and poor
concentration.
 Self-awareness has following advantages:
(1) Person is able to manage and regulate emotions.
41. (c) mental (2) Increases self-confidence in the person.
Explanation: Mental stress, also known (3) Improves leadership skills.
simply as stress, refers to a state of mental (4) Improves decision making skills.

Self - Management Skills - II 23

 46. (b) External Adversity: Adversity refers to the external
Explanation: The motivation which is attained events or situations that trigger stress. These
from the source outside oneself is called are the challenges, difficulties, or stressors
external motivation. Punishment, reward, you encounter in life, such as a tight deadline
promotion, criticism are examples of external at work, a conflict with a friend, or a financial
motivation. problem.
Beliefs: Beliefs represent the thoughts about
Related Theory the adversity and your responses to the
 Love, joy, fear, passion, are examples of internal stressful situation.
motivation.
Consequences: Consequences are the
47. (d) All of these emotional, behavioural, and physiological
Explanation: Physical exercise helps boost responses that result from your beliefs about
up the production of endorphins. Yoga helps the adversity.
to unite mind, body and soul. Vacation helps
reduce stress level by reducing cortisol. 55. An effective time management helps a person
to prioritize the tasks. This helps in maximizing
Related Theory productivity, reducing stress, meeting deadlines
 Dopamine, serotonin and endorphins are feel good and maintaining work-life balance which
chemicals in our body that help reduce stress. further results in achieving long-term goals to
Cortisol is stress hormone that is produced in the succeed in life.
situations of stress.
56. The ability to work independently can be
48. (a) Self-Motivation enhanced by being self-regulated. Self-
Explanation: Self-motivation is the ability regulation guides independent individuals as it
of a person to do the things that need to be helps them to consider long term consequences
done with or without someone or something rather than just transient feelings. It leads to
influencing us. a responsible and a value driven behaviour. It
Caution teaches self-control and well-directed efforts
 Self-discipline, self-awareness and self-regulation all to reach the goal. Self-regulation includes
lead to self-motivation. discipline that helps in consistent efforts to
move towards the goal.
49. (b) self-motivation
57. A person with ability to work independently:
50. (c) Mental
(1) is self-aware
Explanation: Physical stress develops when
(2) knows what to do and when.
we overwork. Inability to handle emotions
leads to emotional stress and financial loss or (3) doesn’t need anyone to make him do a
worries lead to financial stress. work. He himself takes initiatives.
(4) is able to take his own decisions.
51. (d) destressing (5) is able to complete the work on time
Explanation: Vacationing helps in thought-
stopping and reduces cortisol in our body. Thus 58. Mental, physical, social and financial.
it reduces stress.
59. Self-awareness is the ability to recognise one’s
52. (c) walking, skipping mental state, including thoughts, feelings,
Explanation: Physical exercise increases the challenges, and strengths and how it affects
release of endorphins, the feel good hormones, one’s behaviour and decisions. It can be viewed
thus reducing stress. as knowledge of self or being aware of oneself.
Benefits of self-awareness are:
53. (b) Time Management
(1) It helps in making oneself better.
Explanation: Time management is the process
(2) Improves communication skills.
of planning, organising, and prioritising one's
tasks, activities, and responsibilities in a way (3) Enables a person to manage and regulate
that allows for the efficient and effective use of their emotions.
time. It involves allocating and utilising the time 60. (A) Mental: Students feel anxiety and fear
to achieve specific goals and meet deadlines to
during exams and when they are unable
fulfill commitments.
to complete their assignment according to
54. (c) Adversity, Beliefs, Consequences deadlines. High expectations from self also
Explanation: The ABC of stress management leads to anxiety and stress.
stands for Adversity, Beliefs, Consequences, (B) Social: Relationships amongst family
each of which means: members, peer pressure due to over

24 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 expectations from the children to achieve 62. SMART methods to set goals are:
something for status show off leads to S- Specific
social stress at times. M- Measurable
A- Achievable
61. Factors that affect self-confidence are as R-Relevant
follows: T- Time bound
(1) Friends and family. ‘A’ i.e. achievable means that the goal that we
(2) Childhood set should be such that we can attain it in our
bounded time. For this we must break our goal
(3) Work environment.
into small steps and work towards completing
(4) Media each step.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

Self - Management Skills - II 25

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
6. Which of the following is not necessary for
Objective Qs 1 mark maintenance of a computer system?
1. Match the following: (a) Taking weekly backups
(b) Empty recycle bin weekly
(A) Folders (I) Context sensitive (c) Cleaning external peripherals
menu (d) Buying new software and hardware
(B) Sub folders (II) Dashboard 7. Which of the following can be the reason for
(C) Start menu (III) Directory your computer running slow?
(a) A VIRUS running in background
(D) Shortcut menu (IV) Sub directory (b) Too many temporary files
(a) (A)-(I), (B)- (IV), (C)- (III), (D)-(II) (c) Too many open applications
(d) All of these
(b) (A)-(I), (B)-(III), (C)-(II), (D)-(IV)
Question No. 8 and 9 consist of two statements –
(c) (A)-(III), (B)-(IV), (C)-(II), (D)-(I)
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
(d) (A)-(I), (B)-(IV), (C)-(III), (D)-(II) questions selecting the appropriate option given:
2. Who am I? I am temporary memory provided (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
by the operating system that stores data for correct explanation of (A).
short term in an application. The data here (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
remains until some other data comes in. correct explanation of (A).
(a) RAM (b) Clipboard (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(c) ROM (d) Cache (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
3. Identify the INCORRECT statement from the 8. Assertion (A): Deleted files and folders
following. are stored in recycle bin
(a) All data in a computer is stored in form temporarily.
of files. Reason(R): A file deleted from recycle
(b) Each file has a file name and a file bin is permanently deleted.
extension
(c) File name and file extension are 9. Assertion (A): A folder cannot be deleted if it
separated by a dot(.) contains files and subfolders.
(d) All of the above statements are false Reason(R): When a folder is deleted all
the files and subfolders that
4. The way in which user interacts with the
it contains are also deleted.
computer:
(a) Keyboard (b) Input devices
(c) I/O devices (d) Interface Case Based Qs 4 mark
5. DOS, UNIX, LINUX etc are examples of: 10. Tushar is learning to use computer. He has
(a) Software learnt how to create files, folders and also how
(b) Command Line Interface to copy and move them. He has also become
(c) WIMP quite familiar with the various actions he can
(d) All of these perform using mouse and keyboard.
High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

26 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (A) He accidentally deleted a file. Where can 14. Imagine you're exploring a folder in file
he find the deleted file? explorer in Windows 10. In the file explorer
(B) Whenever he hovers his mouse over a file window there are two main areas you'll come
or folder name in file explorer, some text across: the content pane and the navigation
is displayed, what is it?
pane. Write how can you distinguish both
(C) What is the function of the F1 key?
(D) What is the shortcut key for copy and these areas.
paste operations? 15. Imagine you have a computer device, such
11. Kripa purchased a new laptop six months back as a laptop or desktop computer, that you
before her summer vacations. She took it with use regularly for school assignments and
her when she travelled to her grandparent’s entertainment. Discuss how you can take
place. After returning from there she started care of it with daily and yearly maintenance
facing troubles using laptop. measures.
(A) She regularly cleaned the screen of her
laptop by spraying a liquid cleaner and 16. What is antispyware software?
then wiping with a soft cloth. Did she do
the right thing? Why or Why not? 17. Imagine you're setting up an account for
(B) The keys didn’t work properly. What your favourite online game or social media
should she do? platform. Why it's essential to create strong
(C) Every time they got off the car her father passwords and how you can make sure your
asked her to carry the laptop with her. accounts are secure.
Why do you think he did so?
(D) She used to put her laptop on charge
at night so that she could use it early in Long Qs 4 marks
the morning. But now its battery is not
working properly. Why? 18. Files in a computer are arranged in a
hierarchical directory system. Explain.
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
19. Differentiate between copying a file/folder
12. What is LAMP? and moving a file/folder.

13. There is an Indian distribution of GNU/Linux. 20. Tanula accidentally deleted some of her
Write a short note about it. important files. How can she get them back?

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

(a) It can break.
Objective Qs 1 mark (b) It can stop functioning.
(c) It can overheat.
21. What is the term used when you press and
(d) Data can get corrupt.
hold the left mouse key and move the mouse
around? 26. How can an antivirus protect your device?
(a) Highlighting (b) Dragging (a) It can protect device from overheating.
(c) Selecting (d) Moving (b) It can increase device's performance.
(c) It can prevent data from getting corrupt.
22. Which one of the following shortcut keys is
(d) It can backup data.
used to paste a file?
(a) Ctrl + C (b) Ctrl + P 27. Which option is NOT required to keep a
(c) Ctrl + V (d) Ctrl + X device cool?
(a) Keep the device unplugged when in use.
23. What keys do you use to copy something? (b) Do not cover a laptop with a blanket.
(a) Ctrl + X (b) Ctrl + C (c) Make sure computer’s CPU fan is
(c) Ctrl + Z (d) Ctrl + Y working.
24. Which of the following is a valid file extension (d) Avoid leaving the device in the sun.
for notepad file? 28. What should you do to ensure secure online
(a) .jpg (b) .doc transactions?
(c) .text (d) .txt (a) Lock your computer
25. What happens if you leave a device plugged (b) Give credit card or bank details only on
in even after it is charged 100%? safe websites

Information and Communication Technology Skills - II 27

 (c) Use antivirus (D) Operating system starts
(d) Do not use pirated software (E) Welcome screen appears
32. What is the function of the ENTER key?
29. Which of the following trap small children
into inappropriate relations? 33. How will you prevent others from using your
computer?
(a) Online predators (b) Worms
(c) Trojan Horse (d) Antivirus 34. How is a computer file system similar to our
physical file system in a school?
30. What should a strong password consist of ?
35. What are the steps you will perform to save
(a) Only letters a text file in Ubuntu?
(b) Numbers and special characters
36. Explain how to clean a computer on a daily
(c) Name of a person
basis.
(d) Letters, numbers and special characters
37. Explain how Trojan Horse virus works.
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
Long Qs 4 marks
31. Here are the steps that take place when
starting a computer. Rearrange the steps in 38. How can you increase the performance of a
the correct order. computer?
(A) Desktop appears after login
(B) Login screen appears 39. List the various ways you can use to protect
(C) Power on Self-Test (POST) starts your data.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

45. Identify the measure to protect computer
Objective Qs 1 mark from threats and viruses.
(a) Sharing password with friends
40. The filename and filename extension are (b) Allow anyone to use your device
separated by a ................... .
(a) Dollar ($) (c) Use Antivirus
(b) Dot (.) (d) Leave computer without logging out
(c) Underscore (_) [CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021]
(d) Hash (#) [CBSE 2024]
46. Neha is receiving several mails from
41. ..................... are computer programs that can companies who are advertising a product or
damage the data and software programs or trying to attract her to their websites. Such
steal the information stored on a computer. type of mails are called ............. .
(a) Spam (b) VIRUS
(a) Advertising mails
(c) Junk mail (d) BIOS
[CBSE 2023] (b) Bulk mails
(c) Spam mails
42. .................... is a horizontal bar present at (d) Labelled mails [CBSE Term-1 2021]
bottom of the Windows 7 desktop.
(a) Status Bar (b) Menu Bar 47. A computer automatically runs a basic
(c) Task Bar (d) Recycle bin program called ........... as soon as it is
[CBSE 2023] switched ON or the power button is pushed
43. The cleaning of software installed in the ON.
computer cannot be achieved by ................ . (a) BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)
(a) disk cleanup (b) IOS (Input/Output System)
(b) backup (c) BOSS (Basic on System Startup)
(c) cleaning CPU cabinet (d) POS (Power on System)
(d) installing antivirus software [CBSE Term-1 2021]
[CBSE SQP 2020]
48. ............... serves as an interface between the
44. A ................ operating system is a computing
environment that reacts to input within a user and computer.
specific period of time. (a) Operating system
(a) Single User (b) Multi-User (b) Application software
(c) Real Time (d) Distributed (c) System software
[CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021 ] (d) Monitor [Mod. CBSE SQP 2020]

28 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 49. A ...................... is a software that helps you (a) Multiprogramming.
type and work with text on a computer. (b) Multiprocessors.
(a) Word processor (b) Spreadsheet (c) Multi-user.
(c) Calculator (d) DBMS (d) Multitasking. [CBSE SQP 2023]
[Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
50. Which of the following shortcut keys is used
to select all content of a file? 54. Differentiate between files and folders.
(a) Ctrl + A (b) Ctrl + X [CBSE 2023]
(c) Ctrl + V (d) Ctrl + Y
[CBSE Compartment 2021] 55. Write down the steps to create a folder in C
drive with your name.
51. Kartik’s computer was running very slow, [CBSE SQP 2019]
hangs and often restarts. He is very confused
and tensed as he was working on a very 56. How we can prevent computer against
important assignment. Kartik’s friends gave attack by viruses?
him the following suggestions. Identify who [CBSE SQP 2023]
has given him a genuine suggestion.
(a) Radha : Restart your machine 57.What do you mean by Disk Defragmentation?
(b) Ishan : Install reliable antivirus software [CBSE SQP 2022]
and update 58. Very often we hear about spam mails.
(c) Amar : Don’t use Pendrive Explain what are spam mails, and what
(d) Sam : Install free antivirus from net 1 should be done with such mails. [CBSE 2024]
[CBSE SQP 2023]

52. To remove the files of temporary folder, we Long Qs 4 marks

type ............... in Run dialog box after pressing
“Windows button + R” on the keyboard. 59. Ananya uses Internet for her School Project.
(a) #temp# (b) %temp% Suggest any five security measures to
(c) $temp% (d) &temp& ensures safety from online threats.
[CBSE SQP 2023] [CBSE SQP 2018]

53. ............... operating system enables multiple 60. What are the measures to increase the
users to work on the same computer at performance of a computer system?
different times or simultaneously. [CBSE SQP 2020]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
(E) Punctuation (V) Opens the start
Objective Questions keys menu
1. All WIMP’s are GUI’s. (a) (A)-(IV). (B)-(I), (C)-(II), (D)-(III), (E)-(V)
(a) The above statement and its reverse
(b) (A)-(V). (B)-(I), (C)-(IV), (D)-(II), (E)-(III)
both are true.
(b) The above statement is true but its (c) (A)-(I). (B)-(V), (C)-(III), (D)-(II), (E)-(IV)
reverse is not true. (d) (A)-(V). (B)-(IV), (C)-(II), (D)-(I), (E)-(III) 1
(c) The above statement is false but its
reverse is true. 3. During an IT training session, the instructor
(d) The above statement and its reverse explains different types of system
both are false. 1 architectures used in networking and
computing. Client-server and peer-to-peer
2. Match the following systems are types of:
(A) Windows key (I) Ctrl, Shift, Caps (a) CPU
Lock (b) Desktops
(B) Control Keys (II) insert, del,
(c) Distributed Operating Systems
backspace
(C) Navigation keys (III) ‘ ‘, ;, ? (d) GUI OS 1
(D) Command keys (IV) Home Page up, 4. Making a copy of our data regularly helps
page Down, to recover it in case of a system failure. This
End copied data is called:

Information and Communication Technology Skills - II 29

 (a) Clipboard data (b) data copy questions to ask. Help her by answering the
(c) Backup (d) Recovered data following questions.
(A) What is the difference between DOS and
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements
Windows 10?
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
questions selecting the appropriate option given: (B) What is WIMP?
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the correct
(C) Name an OS that is NOT WIMP.
explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the (D) How are commands given in Non-WIMP
correct explanation of (A). interfaces? 4
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. 1 Short Questions
5. Assertion (A): When a search term is
8. Explain how a firewall can help address a
entered in Search box of
business owner's concerns about network
the task bar of a stand
security and preventing unauthorized access.
alone system, files, folders
2
and apps stored on your
system are displayed. 9. As a web developer, you are explaining
Reason(R): To search for information website functionalities to a client. The
online, an active internet client is curious about how the website
connection is required. can remember users' preferences and login
6. Assertion (A): The data in the clipboard information. In this context, explain what
is not available across cookies are and how they function to address
applications. the client's query. 2
Reason(R): Clipboard is temporary 10. Define two types of operating systems
memory provided by the based on the number of users. 2
operating system. 1
Long Questions
Case Based Questions
11. Explain any two functions of an operating
7. Saina uses Windows 10 on her desktop. system. 4
Recently her grandfather visited her and told
her that in early days they used to work on 12. Write one way each to maintain each of the
DOS. His brother told her that now a days a following:
new interface which is not WIMP is used. Now (A) Mouse (B) Keyboard
she is very much confused and has some (C) Monitor (D) File system 4

30 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (d)
Key
1. (c) (A)-(III), (B)-(IV), (C)-(II), (D)-(I) graphical, textual, and auditory elements
Explanation: Names in second column are through which users interact with software
alias for the names in first column. applications, websites, and electronic devices.
User interfaces can include graphical user
Related Theory interfaces (GUIs), command-line interfaces
 A shortcut menu displays the most frequently (CLIs), voice-controlled interfaces, and touch-
required tools for a selected item. As its contents based interfaces, among others.
change with the selection it is also called context
sensitive menu. 5. (b) Command Line Interface
 Folders are the storage locations under which other
files and folders are stored. These are also called Related Theory
directories. A folder within a folder is called a sub  There are two types of operating System interfaces,
folder or sub-directory. Start Menu is launcher for Command Line And Interactive Operating System
all the apps and utilities in a computer so it is also Interface. In command Line Interface user needs to
called dashboard. type in the commands.

Caution 6. (d) Buying new software and hardware

 Start menu is never context sensitive. Its contents Explanation: It is very important to keep our
change as the apps stored in a system are installed computer in good working condition. The
or uninstalled. actions required to do so are called computer
maintenance. If we properly take care and
2. (b) Clipboard maintain our hardware there will be no need
of buying new hardware regularly.
Related Theory
 Whenever some data is cut or copied in any 7. (d) All of these
application it is stored on the clipboard. When paste Explanation: Malware or viruses can consume
operation is performed the data from the clipboard system resources, leading to sluggish
is put at the desired location. This data stays in performance. Accumulated temporary files
the clipboard even if the application is closed, until can clutter your system and slow it down.
another cut or copy operation is performed or the Running multiple applications simultaneously
system is turned off. can strain your computer's memory and
processing power.
3. (d) All of the above statements are false
Explanation: All the statements (a), (b) & (c) 8. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the
are true, therefore statement (d) is incorrect. correct explanation of (A).
Explanation: Whenever a file is deleted it is
4. (d) Interface moved to the recycle bin and it stays there
Explanation: A user interface is the point until it is deleted from the recycle bin. But
of interaction between the user and the when a file is deleted from the recycle bin, it is
computer or device. It encompasses the permanently deleted.

Information and Communication Technology Skills - II 31

 9. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true. 16. An antispyware software is used to detect
spyware installed in the computer. These also
10. (A) Recycle Bin detect and prevent the spyware from getting
(B) On hovering mouse over a file name installed into our computers.
or folder in file explorer, its details are
displayed. 17. Passwords that are not strong enough can
(C) It is used to get help. be easily cracked and thus pose substantial
(D) Copy → Ctrl+C security risks. Strong passwords should not be
Paste → Ctrl+V too small and must be a mix of letters, digits,
and special symbols.
11. (A) Spraying any liquid cleaner or water on the
monitor causes the liquid to get inside the 18. All the files on a computer are saved on disk.
monitor and dampens the electronic parts The disk is divided into drives and each drive
and thus causing malfunctioning of the is divided into directories or folders. The very
screen. first level of directory is known as the root
(B) She should turn off the laptop and remove directory. These directories can further be
any buildup or dirt on her keyboard with a divided into sub-directories or sub folders. Files
can of compressed air and a soft cloth, also of similar type are now saved together in one
she can gently shake laptop upside down folder. This type of file organisation is termed
to get rid of dust. as multilevel or hierarchical directory system.
(C) Leaving the laptop in the car exposed to The sub directories of a directory are known as
sun and heat damages the electronic parts. child and the main directory is known as the
The computer systems should be kept in parent directory. A parent directory can have
optimum temperature. multiple child directories but a child directory
(D) If the devices are left on charging even can have only one parent directory.
after battery is 100% charged it leads
to overcharging and hence damages the 19.
battery.
Copying file/ Moving file/folder
12. Linux, Apache, My SQL and PHP together form folder
a set of webserver programs acronym as (1) When a file or When a file or
LAMP. folder is copied, folder is moved, the
a new copy of it selected file/folder
13. BOSS Linux or Bharat Operating Systems is created at the is removed from its
Solutions. Linux is based on Debian. It is a new location and original place and is
desktop environment with some commonly the original file/ now available at the
used applications which all have been folder exists at new location.
customised to enable the use of Indian its own location.
languages. It has Linux OS kernel. The office (2) To copy a file/ To move a file/folder,
application software included with BOSS folder it is first it is first selected and
is Bharateeyo OS. Web browser included selected and cut to the clipboard.
is Firefox, Thunderbird is the e-mail client then copied to Now the contents
and pidgin is chat application. File sharing / the clipboard. of the clipboard are
converter and multimedia applications are Now the pasted at the desired
also available along with BOSS. contents of the location.
clipboard are
14. pasted to the
Content Pane Navigation Pane
desired location.
(1) It is the right pane It is the left pane
of the file explorer of the file explorer 20. All the files that are deleted from the system
window. window. are moved to recycle bin. The deleted files can
(2) It shows the files It is used to reach be restored from the recycle bin. To restore a
and folders in the any drive or folder in file from the recycle bin:
current folder. the computer. (1) Select the file to be restored.
(2) Click on restore from the ribbon,
15. Daily: (1) Clean your email inbox. The file will be restored at its original location.
(2) Arrange your file in proper folders. This is possible only if the file has not been
Yearly: (1) Update operating system and other deleted from the recycle bin. If a file has
software. been deleted from the recycle bin it can’t be
(2) Check for expiry of the antivirus software. restored.

32 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL
Answer 21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (a) 30. (d)
Key
21. (b) Dragging 29. (a) Online predators

Related Theory Related Theory

 When the mouse button is released after dragging,  Child online safety refers to the practices, guidelines,
it is called drop. Drag and drop operations are use and tools aimed at protecting children from potential
risks and dangers while using the internet and digital
to move objects. Moving the mouse without pressing
devices.
any key is called Hovering.
30. (d) Letters, numbers and special characters
22. (c) Ctrl + V
23. (b) Ctrl + C Related Theory
 Password security refers to the practices and
24. (d) .txt guidelines aimed at creating and maintaining
Explanation: The valid file extension for a secure passwords to protect accounts and sensitive
Notepad file is ".txt", which stands for "text". information from unauthorised access.

31. (C) → (D) → (E) → (B) → (A)

Related Theory
 (1) .jpg: This is a file extension commonly used for 32. ENTER key is used to input commands into a
image files in the JPEG format. Notepad does not computer. It is also used to bring the cursor to
support editing image files. the beginning of the new line.
(2) .doc: This is a file extension used for microsoft
word documents. Notepad cannot open or edit Word 33. To prevent others from using our computer we
documents, as they are in a different format. should use login id and password to login. This
(3) .text: This is not a commonly used file extension. will allow only authorised users to be able to
While it could potentially be used for text files, ".txt" use the computer.
is the more standard extension for plain text files.
34. In educational institutions or workplaces,
25. (c) It can overheat. teachers often have individual cabinets for
storing files related to various students or
Related Theory classes. Similarly, on a computer, data is stored
 Over time, repeated overcharging can shorten the in electronic files, which can be organised into
lifespan of the battery and may even pose a safety distinct folders. This electronic filing system
risk due to the increased risk of overheating or fire. allows for simple management tasks such as
Therefore, it's generally recommended to unplug copying, moving, renaming, or deleting files as
electronic devices once they are fully charged to
needed.
avoid overcharging.
35. Open a text editor, write or edit your text, then
26. (c) It can prevent data from getting corrupt. use the "Save" or "Save As" option from the
Explanation: Antivirus software is one menu or keyboard shortcut Ctrl + S to save the
component of cyber security and works by file.
detecting, preventing, and removing malicious
software (malware) such as viruses, worms, 36. Follow the steps given below daily for
trojans, ransomware, and spyware that can maintaing your computer on daily basis.
compromise the security and integrity of your (1) Wipe all the hardware with soft lint- free
device and data. cloth.
(2) Arrange the files in proper folders.
27. (a) Keep the device unplugged when in use. (3) Download email attachments and save
them in proper folders.
28. (b) Give credit card or bank details only on
safe websites 37. Trojan horse VIRUS disguises itself as a
Explanation: Ensure that the website where legitimate software. Once it gets entry into
you are entering your credit card or bank details a computer system, it starts behaving as a
has a secure connection (look for "https://" and normal VIRUS and spreads itself across the
a padlock symbol in the browser's address system resources, seizing them and causing
bar). malfunctioning of the system.

Information and Communication Technology Skills - II 33

 38. After prolonged use many unnecessary (2) Use Passwords: We should always login
temporary files and images take up large to our computer using passwords. The
amount of disk space and reduce the passwords should be strong and difficult to
performance of our system. To ensure optimum guess.
performance we should regularly clean up the (3) Install antivirus and anti-spyware
Software: Antivirus software ensures that
unwanted files and data and also use some
our data is safe from hijackers, spyware,
disk clean-up software that helps to detect
trojan horses etc. But for these software to
and remove unwanted files. Disk defragment work in their full potential it is important
should also be used to optimise disk space by these should be updated regularly.
defragmenting the fragmented files. (4) Encrypt data: Banks and other
organisations that handle important
39. To ensure data security we should
data use data encryption to ensure data
(1) Use firewall: Firewall keeps a check on the security.
inward and outward data and prevents (5) Secure sites: We should always enter our
malicious data packets from travelling personal data on the sites which we are
across the network. sure are safe.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Answer 40. (b) 41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (c) 45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (a) 49. (a)
Key 50. (a) 51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (c)

40. (b) Dot (.) Explanation: For good maintenance of our

Explanation: A file name consists of two parts computer system its physical cleaning and
– primary name or the name of the file and internal cleaning both are important. Internal
cleaning requires deleting junk and updating
extension or secondary name. The primary
software in addition to using disk defragmenter
name and the extension are separated with a
utility.
period mark or dot (.).

41. (b) VIRUS Related Theory

Explanation: VIRUS stands for Vital Information  If a computer is not maintained properly it may
Resources under Siege. It refers to the malicious slow down or some programs may stop running.
Sometimes even it completely stops working.
software or malware that can cause damage Software and hardware efficiencies are increased.
to your data, files, and software through
replication. 44. (c) Real Time

Related Theory Related Theory

 Spam refers to the unwanted or unsolicited mail  A primary objective of the real time systems is to
that are sent in bulk by the companies, usually for provide quick response times.
promotional purposes. Junk mail refers to unsolicited
mail that companies, charities, political parties,
45. (c) Use Antivirus
and other entities send. The official differentiation 46. (c) Spam Mails
between the two is that spam is unsolicited mail,
Explanation: Spam mails are unwanted or
whereas junk is solicited mail.
unsolicited messages sent via email. These
42. (c) Taskbar messages are typically sent in bulk to a large
Explanation: The windows taskbar lets you number of recipients, with the primary purpose
of promoting products, services, or content,
access frequently used and currently open
often for commercial or fraudulent purposes.
apps. Typically, the taskbar appears as a single
row at the bottom of your desktop; however, 47. (a) BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)
you can change its position. Explanation: The BIOS, or Basic Input/Output
System, is a software component in a computer
Related Theory that resides in ROM. It performs essential
 Windows taskbar consists of start button, taskbar functions as we switch on the computer. It
icon i.e., programs that are pinned on taskbar, system initializes and manages hardware components,
tray which consists of icon for notification, and clock . conducts self-tests, and facilitates the loading
of the operating system from storage into
43. (c) Cleaning CPU cabinet memory. It also provides a basic set of

34 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 instructions for input and output operations, it creates these files and once this app or program
and enables computer to communicate with is closed these files become useless. These take up
peripheral devices like keyboards and monitors. a lot of space on hard disk and should be removed
to prevent our system from slowing down. These
48. (a) Operating system files are also created when we surf the web for
Explanation: An interface provides a way the purpose of caching. These are created when a
for the user to interact with the computer user visits a web page for the first time. Next time
hardware. Operating System is the interface as onwards the access becomes faster.
the commands that we give to the computer Caution
system are received by the operating system  Cookies are not temporary internet files. Cookies are
and it then instructs the respective hardware used to track and store user behaviour.
to perform the requested task.
53. (c) Multi-user
Related Theory Explanation: A multiprogramming Operating
 There are two types of Operating System Interfaces System allows to run multiple programs
namely Command Line Interface(CLI) and Interactive simultaneously.
Operating System Interface. A multiprocessor Operating System handles
Caution multiple processes at the same time. It uses
two or more processors.
 GUI or graphical User Interface is a type of Interactive
Operating System. Multitasking operating systems reduce the
CPU idle time by executing more than one
49. (a) Word processor processes concurrently.
A Multi user operating system allows
Related Theory more than one users to utilise its resources
 Apache OpenOffice and LibreOpenOffice are simultaneously.
examples of open source word processor whereas
MS-word is a proprietary software. Related Theory
50. (a) Ctrl+A  Some other types of operating systems are:
Time Sharing: This provides scheduling of multiple
Explanation: Ctrl+A when pressed together, processes to run on. A Time sharing system is a form
selects all the context of a file or document. of multiprogramming operating system with quick
response time.
Related Theory Real-time Operating System: These respond to a
 Keyboard shortcut for copying is Ctrl+C, for cutting is request in real time i.e. Pre-determined time. These
Ctrl+X and for pasting is Ctrl+V. are useful in scenarios where response time is crucial.
Multi Programming Operating System: These
51. (b) Ishan : Install reliable antivirus software systems allow the execution of multiple programs
and update simultaneously.
Explanation: An antivirus software is a Distributed Operating System: These manage
program designed to detect, prevent, and multiple systems together. It looks to its users like an
remove malicious software (malware) from a ordinary centralized operating system but runs on
multiple independent CPUs.
computer or network. It serves as a crucial tool
Batch Processing Operating System: These
in maintaining the security of digital systems Operating system execute similar types of jobs
by identifying and neutralising threats such as grouped together as a batch, at one go without any
viruses, spyware, ransomware, and other types interruption.
of malicious code.
54. File Folder
Related Theory
 Regular updates are essential for antivirus software Files usually have Folders do not have
to stay effective. Updates typically include the latest extensions. extensions.
virus definitions, security patches, and improvements
A file cannot contain A folder can contain
to combat emerging threats. Keeping your antivirus
another file/folder. any number of files
software up-to-date ensures that it remains capable
and folders.
of identifying and addressing the newest forms of
malware, providing a higher level of protection for A file has its own A folder has no size
your digital devices. size and memory of its own. Its size
consumption. depends on files
52. (b) %temp% stored in it.

Related Theory Files cannot be Folders can be shared

 Temporary files are created by applications for shared on network on network.
internal usage. Every time an app or program runs on their own.

Information and Communication Technology Skills - II 35

 55. To create a folder in C drive: 58. Spam mails are unsolicited emails sent in
(1) Double-click the Computer icon. bulk to a large number of recipients without
their consent. These mails usually promote
(2) Double click on C drive in which we have to
products, services, or fraudulent schemes and
create a folder.
malicious links that. One should set filters in
(3) Right-click anywhere in the blank area of the settings to prevent SPAM from entering
the right pane. A shortcut menu appears. the mail box.
Select New Folder from the shortcut menu.
(4) A new folder is created with name, New 59. Five safety measures:
Folder, highlighted. Now type a name for (1) Use antivirus and antispyware software
the folder. Press Enter key. (2) Use strong passwords
(3) Backup your data
56. We can prevent the computer against attack of (4) Use encryption software
viruses by installing proper antivirus, enabling (5) Keeping your username and password
the firewall, scan external devices before private
using on other computer, by avoiding emails (6) Do not share personal information
that are suspicious or not known to us, being (7) Secure transactions.
very careful while downloading files or any
programs from the internet etc. 60. The performance of a computer can be
increased by removing any extra files such as
57. Whenever a file is saved on the hard disk temporary files and images. We can use some
it is most of the times saved in fragments disk cleaner software, which helps us clean
depending upon the availability of the space. up the unnecessary files. Disk defragment
Disk Defragmentation rearranges these utility should be run periodically so that the
fragments to optimize the space available so fragmented files are rearranged and disk drives
that the disk drives can work more efficiently. work more efficiently.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

36 One Shot Information Technology Class X

4

COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS

5. Select a myth about entrepreneurs from the
Objective Qs 1 mark following:
(a) Entrepreneurs look out for what people
1. State which of the following is a reality want.
about entrepreneurship. (b) Entrepreneurs use materials available
(a) Entrepreneurship has no role in raised in the local markets to materialise their
standard of living. ideas.
(b) Entrepreneurship makes a person role (c) Entrepreneurs have no role in the
model of others. development of the society.
(c) Entrepreneurship doesn’t create wealth. (d) Entrepreneurs are self-disciplined
people.
(d) Entrepreneurship has no role in the
development of a region. 6. When Sarah helps her elderly neighbour
carry groceries home, it showcases her
2. Entrepreneurship contributes to the personal
empathy. Which option best exemplifies this
betterment of an individual. Select the
concept?
statement which is not in adherence to the
(a) A manner (b) Behaviour
above statement.
(c) Quality (d) Nature
(a) One can set his own schedule according
to his/her own. 7. To illustrate the qualities required for
(b) It gives an opportunity to work on one’s entrepreneurship, let's consider Sarah, who
passion. founded her graphic design company. Sarah
(c) Entrepreneurs are not able to create positively presents her design concepts to
wealth. clients, refines her work based on feedback
(d) Entrepreneurs solve problems, to without any complain, and innovatively
improve lives of others. integrates client visions into her designs.
Which option best captures the attributes
3. Karishma Injects funds into those new demonstrated by Sarah necessary for
ventures, that seem to her convincing, in lieu entrepreneurial success?
of convertible debt. She is a: (a) Confident (b) Patient
(a) Angel Investor (c) Creative (d) All of the above
(b) Venture capitalist
(c) Entrepreneur 8. Samira is an integral part of 'The
(d) Intrapreneur Consultants Pvt. Ltd.', where she has specific
responsibilities outlined in her employment
4. Dheeraj needs a machine for her venture but contract, receives a regular salary, and is
she doesn’t have enough funds. She decides entitled to employee benefits such as health
to get funds from a specialized bank. She is insurance and paid leave. Given Samira's
availing: role and benefits, which of the following
(a) Equity financing most accurately describes her relationship
(b) Crowd funding with the company?
(c) ECB (a) Employee (b) Servant
(d) Venture debt (c) Associate (d) Business partner

High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 37
 Question No. 9 and 10 consist of two statements people working for her. Her products are now
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these in demand in international market too.
questions selecting the appropriate option given: (A) Managing so many people requires
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the which entrepreneurial quality?
correct explanation of (A). (B) Which quality of Medha’s character
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the helped her build her venture?
correct explanation of (A). (C) How will Medha’s venture help people
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. associated with her?
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Name a Government scheme which will
help Medha get finance for her business.
9. Assertion (A): Entrepreneur contributes
to the overall growth of Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
the economy.
Reason(R): Entrepreneur simulates 13. To be successful an entrepreneur must have
the growth of related a never give up attitude. Explain.
businesses.
14. Society and Entrepreneur are connected.
10. Assertion (A): An entrepreneur must How?
select anyone for a role
and appoint him. 15. Being open-minded favours an entrepreneur.
Reason(R): Team building involves How?
choosing the right
16. Differentiate between a waged employee
candidate and evaluating
and a self-employed person.
their value for the venture.
17. Sarah works as a graphics designer at
Case Based Qs 4 marks a design agency and John runs his own
photography business. Sarah receives a fixed
11. Joy is a BBA student and passionate about salary from her employer and follows a set
plants and trees. He loved to experiment with schedule, while John sets his own working
growing and nurturing plants in his school hours, takes on projects independently,
days. During his college days he came across and determines his rates. What does this
a new technique of farming that is called case study represent in terms of nature of
hydroponics. Now he has set up his own farm employment of the two?
in Dehradun and is successfully running his
business and is even teaching others about 18. Sanjeev is a Solopreneur. Who is he?
this technique of farming that requires very 19. Entrepreneurship requires putting in rigorous
less land and mostly water. mental and physical efforts. Why?
(A) What type of entrepreneur is Joy?
(B) Name any two Government schemes 20. Kusum is a woman entrepreneur who needs
that would have helped Joy in his early funds for her business. Suggest her an easy
days. way to secure loan.
(C) Name any two qualities that might
have helped Joy to become a successful 21. Give any two reasons that stop many people
entrepreneur. from becoming an entrepreneur.
(D) If he requires more funds to expand his 22. ‘Entrepreneurship is a one person show.’ Is
venture what are the two options that this a myth or reality? Elaborate.
he can choose from?
23. Expand the following:
12. Medha is a home maker married into a middle (A) CGS
class family. Earning members of her family run (B) NBFC
their own business. She has a lot of spare time (C) ECB
so she decides to spend her free time following (D) HNI
her passion for designing and making pottery.
One day her husband showed her creations 24. Define the following
to his friends who loved it and requested her (A) Mompreneur
to make a few tailored pieces for them. She (B) Agripreneur
started getting more and more requests and
it turned into a financial venture. Now she Long Qs 4 marks
even hired a lady from her neighbourhood
and taught her how to make pottery. Slowly 25. Government of India has brought in
her team grew and now she has around fifty initiatives like Start-up India and Make In

38 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 India. What were the reasons behind these How are these related to success of an
policies? enterprise?

26. Entrepreneurs are more often responsible 29. There are several reasons that lead to the
for bringing technological changes. How? downfall of an entrepreneur. List them.

27. What turns an idea into a successful 30. Kanika and shivika both sell ready to eat
enterprise? foods. Kanika was pioneer in this field and
sold these at her own willed prices, as
28. Arnav is a budding entrepreneur. His father Shivika and some others also started the
tells him that to start and be successful in same venture, she had to lower down the
any business one should understand the prices. Why selling a products at lower prices
relation between needs, want and demands. is disadvantageous for the entrepreneurs?

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

35. Mary buys bulbs for her business from
Objective Qs 1 mark Noida. She learns that bulbs are cheaper in
31. State whether the following statements are Faridabad. So, she decides to start buying
True or False. bulbs from there.
Tick the correct option for the function that
(I) Entrepreneurs can create jobs in the
the entrepreneur is doing.
market.
(II) When many entrepreneurs sell mobile (a) Makes decisions (b) Divides income
phones in a market, the prices of phones (c) Takes risk (d) None of these
increase. 36. Rehnuma has two people who work for her.
(III) Entrepreneurs identify a need in the Every day, she spends one hour with them
market and build a product or service for to learn about what they’ve done that day.
it. (a) Creates a new product
(a) (I) and (III) are true (b) Divides income
(b) (II) and (III) are true (c) Manages the business
(c) All are false (d) Takes risk
(d) All are true
37. Match each story below with the
32. Ravi’s customer comes to his store and starts misconception about entrepreneurship.
shouting at him. He does not get angry. He
Story Misconception
listens to what his customer is saying. He is
............... . (A) Ramu owns a (I) Every business
(a) hardworking (b) confident large clothes shop. idea needs to
(c) patient (d) trying new ideas Shamu has a be unique or
small store selling special.
33. Susheela decides to sell her company’s tyres handmade sarees.
in Sri Lanka. It does not sell and she has a Shamu does not
call himself an
loss. She apologises to the people who work
entrepreneur.
for her. She says she will plan better next
time. She ............... . (B) Annu has a great (II) Entrepreneurs
(a) takes responsibility for her mistakes idea for a website. are born, not
She has `5,000. made.
(b) thinks before making a decision She is waiting for
(c) does not give up `20,000 more, so
(d) is creative that she can start
it.
34. Ali has a diamond factory. He pays his
employees on the 1st of every month. (C) In a city of thou- (III) A person needs
Tick the correct option for the function that sands of tailoring to have a big
shops, Gauri is a business to be
the entrepreneur is doing. tailor who stitch- called anentre-
(a) Creates a new product es good quality preneur.
(b) Manages the business clothes and has
(c) Takes risk a very successful
business.
(d) All of these

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 39
 (a) (A)-(I); (B)-(II); (C)-(III)
Long Qs 4 marks
(b) (A)-(III); (B)-(II); (C)-(I)
(c) (A)-(II); (B)-(I); (C)-(III) 41. List the ways in which an entrepreneur
affects a society.
(d) (A)-(III); (B)-(I); (C)-(III)
42. What do you think is the most important
38. Write against the option, if the business idea function of an entrepreneur? Write your
is of self-employment or wage employment. answer giving suitable examples.
(I) Cooking in a restaurant
(II) Owning a clothing business Case Based Qs 4 mark
(III) Having a dosa selling stall
(a) Wage employment→(I) Self Employment 43. Bharti is a young woman from Bihar. Many
girls in her area like to wear earrings. She buys
→ (II) & (III)
jute from a farmer and makes earrings from
(b) Wage employment→(II) Self Employment that. Her business is called Manavi Natural
→ (I) & (III) Handicrafts. She sees that most women in her
(c) Wage employment→(III) Self village do not work. So, she hires two women to
Employment → (I) & (II) help her. As her orders increase, she buys more
(d) Wage employment → (I) & (II) Self jute. She hires three more women to work for
her. The farmer, and the women working for
Employment → (III)
her now earn more money.
39. Match the columns to correctly define They are able to save money for their future.
different stages of entrepreneurship. Do you think Bharti is an entrepreneur? Read
her story and tick the correct answer for each
(A) Surbhi opens 5 (I) Enter question given below.
painting stores (A) What demand did Bharti identify in her
across India. village?
(B) What is the local resource that Bharti
(B) There are many (II) Survive
used?
coaching classes
(C) How is Bharti helping her village grow?
in Mumbai. Jacob
(D) How was she creating more jobs?
owns one of them.
He is starting 44. Sheila is 35 years old. She loved to drive. She
morning batches worked hard for five years and bought a taxi
to attract more for herself. She wanted to be different from
students to his other taxi drivers in the city. She said ‘hello’
classes. to her customers. She would put that day’s
newspaper in her car, for her customers to read.
(C) Salma has started (III) Grow
her clothing line on She had a small TV where customers could
the Internet. watch different channels. She also had a board
with the numbers of the nearby hospitals and
(a) (A) – (III); (B) – (I); (C) – (II) hotels. Because of this, customers would stand
(b) (A) – (III); (B) – (II); (C) – (I) in line to take a ride in her amazing taxi!
(c) (A) – (I); (B) – (III); (C) – (II) After reading Sheila’s story, answer the
(d) (A) – (II); (B) – (I); (C) – (III) questions that follow.
(A) What was Sheila doing?
Short Q 2 marks (B) Why was she doing it?
(C) Many people think she is not an
40. What is the difference between a entrepreneur. Is it a misconception or
misconception and reality? Give an example. reality? Give reasons.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

46. An ............... is a person who establishes a
Objective Qs 1 mark business or a venture that generates some
45. Which of the following is NOT an essential value to the customer and proves to be
quality to become a successful entrepreneur? profitable for him.
(a) Confidence (b) Creativity (a) Employee (b) Employer
(c) Patience (d) Wealthy (c) Entrepreneur (d) Associate
[CBSE 2024] [Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]

40 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 47. Entrepreneurship has a crucial role in the (a) They create needs and demands.
................ of the society. (b) They provide raw materials.
(a) evolution (b) planning (c) They do not create jobs.
(c) functioning (d) none of these (d) They help society by supporting
[CBSE SQP 2020] infrastructure development.
[CBSE 2022]
48. From the following statements, which one
is NOT correct about the qualities of an 52. Which of the following is/are a myth about
entrepreneur. entrepreneurship?
(a) Successful entrepreneurs adapt the habit (a) Need a lot of Money
of hard work from a very early stage. (b) Must have a great Idea
(b) Entrepreneur should not think (c) Should know everything about business
optimistically about the future of the (d) All of these
business. [CBSE SQP 2023]
(c) Confident entrepreneur must not deviate
from his/her decisions too early in case Very Short & Short Qs 3 marks
success is delayed.
53. What are the myths about entrepreneurship?
(d) Entrepreneurs like to function at their
Explain any two. [CBSE SQP 2022]
own will and rules. [CBSE SQP 2022]
OR
49. From the following statements, which one is Mention any two misconceptions about the
not the positive impact of entrepreneurship entrepreneurship. [CBSE 2024]
on society?
54. Give any one quality of a successful
(a) Stimulates Innovation and Efficiency entrepreneur. [CBSE Term-2 SQP 2022]
(b) Creates Jobs and Employment Opportunities
OR
(c) Solves the problems of the society Give any two qualities of a successful
(d) Discourages welfare of the society entrepreneur. [CBSE 2022]
[CBSE SQP 2022]
55. Explain any two functions of an entrepreneur.
50. State whether the following statement is a [CBSE Term-2 SQP 2022]
myth or reality.
Entrepreneurs are born a certain way. 56. Why do we say that an entrepreneur should
(a) Myth be open-minded? [CBSE SQP 2023]
(b) Reality 57. Give any two promotional functions of an
(c) Partially myth, partially reality entrepreneur. [CBSE 2023]
(d) Neither myth nor reality
[Mod. CBSE 2022] Long Q 4 marks
51. Which one of the following is NOT true for 58. Write any four roles of entrepreneurs.
entrepreneurs? [CBSE SQP 2022]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
2. Managing payments from customers,
Objective Questions making payments to vendors, paying
1. In a discussion about contemporary ways of salaries, office bills, debt repayment etc. all
how people can contribute to their country's refer to ............... .
development and showcase their patriotism, (a) time management
various roles and actions are considered. (b) team building
Which of the following is considered a (c) innovation
modern form of patriotism? (d) cash flow management 1
(a) Political parties
3. During a workshop on entrepreneurship,
(b) Rule-abiding citizens
the facilitator discusses the key factors
(c) Army men that contribute to the success of a start-up.
(d) Entrepreneurship 1 They emphasize the importance of various

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 41
 criteria such as alignment with market have enough time to do their laundry. The
needs, feasibility of the business model, laundry people that are working for them are
and viability of the financial plan. Which of not regular. He starts his own laundry service
the following is NOT essential for start-up and hired two laundry professionals and one
success? delivery boy in the beginning. He decides to
(a) Alignment (b) Feasibility develop a laundry app that will help students
(c) Viability (d) Reliability 1 and professionals book timely pickup and drop
of their laundry. They can select the service
4. A scheme launched to help the micro and type and accordingly pay for the services
small enterprise sector avail collateral free availed.
small business loans: (A) What made Anubhav come up with the
(a) Start-up India Scheme idea of the laundry app?
(b) MUDRA (B) Which quality of Anubhav is highlighted
(c) CGS in his decision?
(d) Make In India 1 (C) Name any two businesses that will grow
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements with Anubhav’s venture.
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these (D) Will Anubhav’s venture help in the
questions selecting the appropriate option given: development of his area? how? Write
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the one point. 4
correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the Short Questions
correct explanation of (A).
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. 8. How entrepreneurship helps raise standard
of living? 2
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true.

5. Assertion (A): Entrepreneurship in other

9. 60% of the people think that entrepreneurship
is an easy way to get rich. How true is it? 2
words is perseverance.
Reason(R): Entrepreneurs have leisure 10. ‘Entrepreneur must be ready to walk alone
of chilling out and doing on an unknown path’. In the light of the
work as and when they above statement explain the qualities of an
please. 1 entrepreneur. 2
6. Assertion (A): To be successful an
entrepreneur must avoid Long Questions
competitions.
11. How does entrepreneurship affect a society?
Reason(R): Competition helps one to
List any 4 ways. 4
think out of box and bring
new ideas and practices to 12. Siddhant is an ambitious boy. He loves
stay ahead. 1 challenges and threads the unexplored
paths. His father wants him to become an
Case Based Questions engineer and secure a respectable job. But
he wishes to start his own venture. What are
7. Anubhav found that in his area there are a the disadvantages of entrepreneurship that
lot of students and professionals living alone his father tells him to make him change his
away from their homes. These people don’t decision? 4

42 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (d)
Key
1. (b) Entrepreneurship makes a person role ventures by specialised banks or non-bank
model of others. lenders.
Explanation: When an entrepreneur becomes
successful, he becomes role model for the new 5. (c) Entrepreneurs have no role in the
generation. development of the society.
Explanation: An entrepreneur looks for what
Related Theory people want and how they can turn this need
 Entrepreneur generates employment and thus into a successful business idea. They use the
increases the earning power of people and in turn locally available material and resources to
raising the standard of living.
lower the cost. Entrepreneurs need to be
 As Entrepreneurs attract fund for their ventures, the self-disciplined as they are their own boss.
money is mobilised and more wealth is generated.
Entrepreneurs create wealth and employment,
 When an Entrepreneur sets up his infrastructure in
less developed and backward areas, development of
in turn raising the earning powers of the
roads, rail links, schools and colleges etc. is promoted, employees and other associates. New ventures
adding to the regional development. also lead to the development of infrastructure
in the area.
2. (c) Entrepreneurs are not able to create
wealth. 6. (b) behaviour
Explanation: Entrepreneurs are able to create
wealth in case they succeed. 7. (d) All of the above
Explanation: An entrepreneur must be creative
3. (a) Angel Investor enough to come up with a business idea. He
Explanation: Angel investors are high net
must be confident about the decisions he
worth individuals who invest in a business in
makes and patiently wait for the success.
return for ownership equity or convertible debt.
A venture capitalist raises funds from various 8. (a) Employee
sources and in turn provides funds to start- Explanation: A person who works for someone
ups. Intrapreneurs are employees of a business else is called an employee.
or organisation that have an entrepreneurial
mindset and are ready to take initiatives for Related Theory
their company.
 Someone who hires others to carry out a job is called
employer.
Related Theory
 Angel investors provide one time investment or may 9. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
inject funds at the stages of difficulties early in a
correct explanation of (A).
start-up.
Explanation: With a new venture many new
4. (d) Venture debt and old businesses that support this venture
Explanation: Venture debt is provided as flourish leading to an overall economic
working capital or capital for equipment to development.

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 43
10. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true (2) A waged employee A self-employed person
Explanation: Team building is a very thoughtful works according to is always trying new
process. Only right team can convert the ideas the instructions he ideas to make his
into reality. So an entrepreneur must very gets. business better.
carefully build his team.
17. Sarah is a waged employee, while John is self-
Related Theory employed.
 Not only appointing a candidate is important, 18. A person who runs a business without a
assessing their exact value for the business is also partner is a solopreneur. Such businesses are
very important. Sometimes an employee is over like consulting, coaching or freelancing.
paid while an underpaid employee can be more
valuable. This ultimately can cause resentment and 19. In the initial stages of a venture it is very
unnecessary stress. important for an entrepreneur to put in long
and hard work hours. They need to put their
11. (A) Agripreneur work on fore foot for the success of their
(B) Start-up India Scheme and CGS (Credit venture.
Guarantee Fund Scheme).
20. Stand-Up India scheme by GOI provides bank
Related Theory loans between Rs. 10 Lakh to 1 Crore to at
 Start up India scheme was launched to promote
least one SC or one ST or a woman borrower
and support startups by providing bank finances. per bank branch. The repayment period of
Credit guarantee scheme guarantees credit upto a such loans is maximum of 7 years.
specified limit against loans extended by Member
21. Many people think that entrepreneurs are born
Institutions. and not made. For them entrepreneurship runs
(C) (1) Ability to align his passion with his idea. in blood and thus they give up on the idea of
(2) Dedication and focused approach. becoming an entrepreneur.
(D) Equity financing and Debt financing
22. The statement here is a myth. Though it is true
12. (A) Team building that for being an entrepreneur one must be a
(B) Hard work pool of qualities but the main quality required
(C) There will be an increase in the earning is the art of delegation. He must know which
power of her employees which in turn will tasks can and should be outsourced and got
increase their living standards and bring in done so that he can concentrate on the core
prosperity. product or service.
(D) Stand up India Scheme. 23. (A) Credit Guarantee Fund Scheme
(B) Non-banking Financial Company
13. Perseverance and persistence are important
(C) External Commercial Borrowings
in lives of successful entrepreneurs. They
(D) High Net worth Individuals
must always be ready to face challenges and
failures and come up with working solutions 24. (A) A woman entrepreneur also taking care of
for each set back. her family and kids is a Mompreneur.
(B) An entrepreneur actively involved in
14. An entrepreneur starts his business to fulfil improving output and economic earning in
the needs and demands of the society. As agriculture sector by using new technology
the entrepreneur grows he contributes to the and techniques is an agripreneur.
economy, infrastructure and social causes of
the society. 25. Start-up India and Make in India projects were
started by GOI to bring in foreign investments
15. Open minded person always welcomes new in Indian economy so that our standards are
ideas and perspective, which is helpful in raised to the global level. Since these projects
identifying new opportunities and turning have encouraged new entrepreneurs thus
them into successful ventures. helping Indian economy as follows:
(1) Entrepreneurship creates wealth and helps
16. in mobilising money.
Waged employee Self-employed (2) Many other businesses that help these
start-ups have also flourished.
(1) A waged employee A self-employed person
(3) As GOI provides benefits and concessions
is the one who is the one who starts
to these start-ups to setup their enterprises
works for someone business to satisfy the
in backward or less developed areas ,
else and gets paid needs of others. infrastructure in these regions have also
for the work done. developed.

44 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (4) New ventures require many resources like 29. There are several misqualities that can degrade
land, labour, raw material etc. and develop the overall entrepreneurial skill which includes:
new products. All this adds up to per capita (1) An entrepreneur's inability to adjust and
Income and GDP. change their business strategy according
(5) When businesses expand they look for to the changing market can lead to his
expansion outside the country also and
degradation.
thus lead to currency inflow.
(2) Taking inappropriate risks, and ignoring
26. Entrepreneurs develop their business with opportunities and challenges due to over
available resources. Depending on the confidence leads to downfall.
availability of resources, technical know- how (3) An entrepreneur who gives up easily or
required, entrepreneurs can introduce following loses motivation, can degrade their abilities
technological changes. and cause their company to fail.
(1) The products and services developed by (4) An entrepreneur who lacks time
entrepreneurs frequently alter consumer
management skills may struggle to
habits and generating fresh demands and
manage his workload effectively. Not able
hence creating a requirement for new
technology. to prioritise tasks, meet deadlines and
(2) Entrepreneurs improve the customer achieve their objectives results in failure of
experience using innovative technologies. business.
(3) Entrepreneurs develop user friendly (5) When there are many entrepreneurs in the
apps and customer service applications same business, products are sold at lower
thus including the customer to buy new prices.
technology.
30. When many entrepreneurs sell the same
27. An idea alone cannot be the foundation of a product at a lower price it leads to:
successful business. An idea old or new can be (1) Reduced Profit Margins: Profit margins
successful only if it is turned into reality with decrease and entrepreneurs face difficulties
proper planning, focus, dedication and hard
to run or expand their enterprises.
work. The plans with best execution strategy
(2) Cut throat Competition: The level of
and leadership quality of the entrepreneur turn
the idea into success. competition may rise as a result small
businesses, which do not have the same
28. As an entrepreneur, it is most important resources as their larger rivals suffer.
to understand the relationship between a (3) Quality Compromises: In an effort to
consumer’s needs, wants, and demands. keep costs low. Entrepreneurs are forced to
This helps in strategically design and market compromise the quality of their products,
products for their target market.
harming the company's reputation and
(1) The basic necessities of life like food,
reducing client satisfaction.
shelter, clothing, and safety, are needs of
a consumer. (4) Limited Differentiation: There will be less
(2) Consumer wants encompass desires. These brand loyalty and customer retention as
are not essential requirements but luxuries customers have many available options.
that improve one's lifestyle. (5) Difficulty in Scaling: Too many
(3) Consumer demands are those desires that entrepreneurs in race bring scarcity of
are well within consumer’s purchasing resources, heightened competition, and a
power. dearth of consumer demand.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

Answer 31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (b)
Key
31. (a) (I) and (III) are true 32. (c) patient
Explanation: Entrepreneurs build teams, Explanation: Being patient refers to state of
mind when one doesn’t loose control over any
they employ people and hence create jobs.
situation.
Entrepreneurs identify needs of people around
them and then come up with an idea to fulfill 33. (a) takes responsibility for her mistakes
that need. When there are many entrepreneurs Explanation: Susheela apologising to
selling the same product the price of that her employees and acknowledging her
product decreases. responsibility for the failure of her decision to

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 45
 sell company tyres in Sri Lanka indicates that (1) Entrepreneur creates jobs – An entrepreneur
she is taking ownership of her mistakes. This is a job creator who employs job-seekers.
shows maturity and accountability, which are (2) Entrepreneur helps raise standards of
traits associated with taking responsibility for living–An entrepreneur creates jobs
one's actions. Commitment to plan better next thus increasing the earning power of his
time shows that she is not disheartened by her employees and other associates. This in-
initial failure.
turn increases the spending power and
34. (b) Manages the business helps raise standards of living.
Explanation: An entrepreneur needs to look (3) Entrepreneur is an inspiration – A successful
into the payments of salaries, debts and other entrepreneur is a role model for future
expenses. generations.
(4) Entrepreneur aids in overall development
35. (a) Makes decisions
Explanation: An entrepreneur is free to take of the society–entrepreneur invest in
decisions and also abide by them. He owes community projects and provide financial
the responsibility of any consequence of the support for many social issues.
business.
42. The most important function of an
36. (c) Manages the business entrepreneur is taking risk. One notable Indian
Explanation: One of the key roles of an example of risk-taking in entrepreneurship
entrepreneur is to manage business. Managing is the story of Bhavish Aggarwal, the co-
business is not only about managing cash flow founder of Ola Cabs. Bhavish took a significant
but also about managing and building the risk by entering the highly competitive and
team. regulated transportation industry in India with
the vision of revolutionising urban mobility
37. (b) (A)-(III); (B)-(II); (C)-(I)
through technology. Despite facing challenges
38. (a) Wage employment → (I) Self Employment → such as regulatory hurdles, competition, and
(II) & (III) funding constraints, Aggarwal persisted and
successfully scaled Ola Cabs into one of the
39. (b) (A)-(III);(B)-(III); (C)-(I) largest ride-hailing companies in India. His
Explanation: There are three stages in the risk-taking mindset, coupled with strategic
life of an entrepreneur. Enter → When an decision-making and innovation, enabled Ola
entrepreneur has just started his business. to disrupt the traditional taxi industry and
Survive → If there are other competitors in provide millions of customers with convenient
the market an entrepreneur has to plan his and affordable transportation options.
survival.
Grow → Once an entrepreneur survives, he 43. (A) Girls in her area liked to wear earrings
then looks towards expansion of his business. (B) Jute
(C) Bharti buys jute from the local farmer and
40. also hires local women to turn that jute into
Misconception Reality
finished product, so both the groups are
Misconception is a Reality is what now able to earn more and save money for
false idea or belief actually is true. The their future.
with no supporting facts can be argued in (D) By providing jobs to local women.
reason. favour with supporting
information. 44. (A) Sheila started a business.
(B) She was doing it because it was her passion
E.g., It’s a In reality entrepreneurs and by aligning it with her idea she could
misconception have to work very hard give good service to her customers.
that entrepreneurs to make their venture (C) Many of us may not call Sheila an
enjoy a luxurious a success. They have entrepreneur because she had a taxi
and stress free life. lot of decisions to business. However, she was working for
take, so many things herself, was thinking about what her
to manage, and many customers would want and was adding
responsibilities. During good things to her taxi. As per definition,
early days of their
she is an entrepreneur. No business is big
venture they don’t
or small. If a person is running a business
even have time for
to fulfill a customer need, they are an
their families and self.
entrepreneur. Most businesses start
41. An entrepreneur has the following effects on small. It becomes big with hard work and
the society: creativity.

46 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS
Answer 45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (d) 50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (d)
Key
45. (d) Wealthy The primary thing that an entrepreneur needs
Explanation: Wealth is often a result of to know is, the knowledge and experience
success rather than a quality of success itself. required for the business. The business tactics
Successful entrepreneurs typically focus on can be learnt from their experiences over the
creating value, solving problems, and building time.
sustainable businesses. Earning profits or 53. Myths about entrepreneurship are:
wealth is a byproduct of these efforts. (1) The misconception is that every business
46. (c) Entrepreneur idea needs to be unique or special.
Each entrepreneur saw customer demand
47. (c) Functioning and brought a new idea into their business.
Explanation: Entrepreneurs work to create A person can take an idea that is already
jobs, wealth, help develop the infrastructure there in the market and do something
and also to solve many social problems. different with it.
48. (b) Entrepreneur should not think optimistically (2) The misconception we have is that a person
about the future of the business. needs a lot of money to start a business.
Explanation: Being optimistic very early in a Every business does not need a lot of
start-up lures one to make wrong decisions. capital to start. Depending on how much
money you have or can borrow, you can
49. (d) Discourages welfare of the society start a business with that much money.
Explanation: An entrepreneur survives on Once you make more money, you can put
the society, so he always looks ways for that into your business to make it bigger.
betterment of the society. (3) A misconception we have is that only
a person having a big business is an
50. (a) Myth entrepreneur.
Explanation: Entrepreneurial skills is not a
No business is big or small. If a person is
born talent. It can be learned, polished and running a business to fulfill a customer’s
developed by anyone who wants to be an need, they are an entrepreneur. Most
entrepreneur. businesses start small. It becomes big with
51. (c) they do not create jobs hard work and creativity.
Explanation: As their business grows, (4) A misconception we have is that
entrepreneurs look for more people to help entrepreneurs are born, not made.
them. They buy raw material, they need people Only some people have the talent for
for manufacturing, promoting and selling their doing business. An entrepreneur is a person
products. They hire both skilled and unskilled who does whatever it takes to make the
people, hence create jobs. business successful.
(5) A misconception is that entrepreneurs are
52. (d) All of these high risk takers.
Explanation: It is a myth that entrepreneurship They are neither high nor low risk – takers.
requires a lot of money to get started. Some They always prefer situations which lead
businesses may require a large sum of money, to generating profits.
but there are others that can be started with a (6) Entrepreneurs become rich as they start a
small amount e.g., online businesses that need new business.
very little money. Starting a business does not mean that
Another myth is that an entrepreneur must person will become rich overnight. A new
have a ground-breaking idea. Not every business always needs a span of year or
successful business is built on a great idea. two to become successful.
Many successful entrepreneurs have found (7) Entrepreneurs are Job hoppers.
success by addressing existing needs, improving They are not job hoppers. They are the
existing products or services, or applying a ones who create job opportunities for the
unique approach to a common problem. people. They work for many years and
The misconception that an entrepreneur must gain experience before starting any new
know everything about business is also not true. venture.

Entrepreneurial Skills - II 47
 (8) Entrepreneurs have limited dedication ahead of them and better solutions to
Dedication is the key to success. An problems. Open-minded entrepreneurs are
entrepreneur can never be successful able to strategise better because they can
unless he is dedicated towards his work. listen to varying and look at a problem through
(Any other related myth) multiple lenses.

54. A successful entrepreneur must have following 57. An entrepreneur’s role is diversified and
qualities: promotional function is one of them. It includes
(1) Will power and Focused: This quality is the following:
key to success for an entrepreneur. It takes (1) Discovery of Idea: The success of a startup
a long time to achieve success. Despite the lies in the idea behind it. Before initiating
failures, an entrepreneur must not lose will any business an entrepreneur comes up
and focus to achieve. with an idea and find ways to implement
(2) Management: It is the ability to make it. This process usually involves study
plans, devise targets, and then execute. An of market needs and finding out profit
entrepreneur should be a good manager to potential in that idea.
perform all these tasks successfully. (2) Detailed Investigation: Generating an
Note: Students can also write any of the idea is not a difficult process. However,
following too: implementation of the idea and to find
They are confident . if it has the potential to turn into a viable
They are self-disciplined. business venture is more difficult. For this,
They are creative.
an entrepreneur conducts market survey,
They are team builders.
evaluates the profit and loss in the idea
They are risk takers.
considering various factors and estimates
55. Two functions of an entrepreneur are: the total demand for a new product or
(1) Making decisions service.
(2) Managing the business
(3) Divide income
58. Any four roles of entrepreneurs are:
(4) Taking risk (1) Coordinating role
(5) Create a new method, idea or product (2) Agent’s role
[Any two] (3) Innovator’s Role
(4) Risk assumption role
56. The smartest and most successful people (5) Imitating role
welcome new ideas and diverse perspectives, (6) Capital formation role:
allowing them to see more opportunities (7) Employment generation role

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

48 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
5. Which of the following was seen as a need
Objective Qs 1 mark to adopt Sustainable Development Goals?
(a) Overexploitation of the natural resources
1. Select which of the following is NOT a goal (b) Scarcity of resources
for sustainable development. (c) Climate change
(a) Long term stability of the economy. (d) All of these
(b) Protection of natural environment.
(c) Not focusing on growth and development 6. ‘Reducing food losses along production and
at all. supply chains and to reduce the per capita
global food wastage to half ’ defines which
(d) Driving innovation.
goal of SDG?
2. For developing countries like India, the (a) Good health and well-being
budget allocated by the Government falls (b) Reduced inequalities
(c) Responsible consumption and production
short, due to other aspirational projects.
(d) Affordable and clean energy
How can this be countered?
(a) Governments should increase the budget. 7. Select the reason behind the challenge in
(b) Encouraging partnership between data for measuring purposes faced by the
private and public sectors. Indian Government.
(c) Seek for private sector investments (a) Large Population of India
wherever possible. (b) Data being unavailable at sub-national
(d) Both (b) and (c) level
(c) Incompatible administration
3. NITI Aayog supervises and coordinates (d) Absence of a statistical organisation
actions and schemes of sustainable
8. As an individual we must contribute to the
development. Which of the following is NOT goals of sustainable development. Select
its Flagship Programme? which of the following is not an individual’s
(a) Swachh Bharat responsibility.
(b) Make in India (a) Our actions must ensure social equality
(c) Skill India and equity.
(d) PMSYM (b) Our actions must contribute least to
global emission of Carbon.
4. Which of the following is a target towards (c) Our actions must ensure eco-innovations.
achieving the goal of good health and well- (d) Our actions must not seek partnerships
being for all? or good governance.
(I) Halve the number of global deaths. Question No. 9 and 10 consist of two statements
(II) Halve the number of injuries from road – Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
accidents. questions selecting the appropriate option given:
(III) Halve the global wastage of food. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
(IV) Promote the social inclusion of all. correct explanation of (A).
(V) Encourage youth to get educated and (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
work. correct explanation of (A).
(a) (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V) (b) (I) & (II) only (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(c) (I), (III), (V) (d) (II), (IV), (VI) (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Green Skills - II 49
 9. Assertion (A): Development and Environment (C) Why climate action is included in SDG?
are two different issues. (D) List one challenge that you think is faced
Reason(R): Development comes at the by the GOI in implementation of this
SDG.
cost of environment and
protecting environment may
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
lead to a retarded growth.
13. What is the scope of a goal, particularly when
10. Assertion (A): We must turn off light and
considering a community initiative aimed at
use natural light more
achieving Sustainable Development Goal 2:
whenever and wherever
Zero Hunger?
possible.
Reason(R): Turning off lights is important 14. Use of non- biodegradable products should be
only for the health benefits discouraged, we should focus on production
and use of biodegradable products.
associated with it.
Differentiate between biodegradable and
Case Based Qs 4 marks non-biodegardable.

15. What does the Goal 8 about decent work

11. Due to poor socio-economic setting in many
and economic growth targets at?
countries like India, there has been a huge
gap in access to the health, sanitation and 16. In agricultural practices, water is essential
basic amenities for different sections of the for irrigation, energy is required for
society. Now a days pharmaceuticals are the machinery and transportation, and food
key players in making health facilities out- production consumes both energy and water
of pocket. Sometimes these amounts are so resources. By understanding and managing
huge that it leads to a catastrophe to families these inter-dependencies, stakeholders can
and individuals. Indian government has taken develop more sustainable practices that
many steps towards curbing these kind of address the needs of all three sectors while
inequalities. minimising environmental impacts. Thus,
(A) Name a Scheme by GOI to bring medical FEW-N promotes holistic approaches to
aid and health facilities well within the resource management and fosters resilience
reach of everyone. in the face of challenges such as climate
(B) Name the SDG towards which the above change and population growth. What is
scheme aims. FEW-N?
(C) List some actions that as an individual 17. One of the challenges faced by the Indian
you should take to ensure this goal. government in SDG implementation is of
(D) In a country like India what are the data for measuring progress. How is this a
challenges to achieve this goal. Write challenge?
any one.
18. Name the four dimensions of sustainable
12. Jatin has many times heard his grandparents development.
talking about the weather conditions in the 19. What is the purpose of Peace in 5P’s of SDG?
past. They very often tell that when they
were young the weather conditions not used
Long Qs 4 marks
to be so harsh. Summer evenings were much
cooler and summer season spanned over two 20. Imagine a rural village in India striving to
or three months only. Winters were also colder achieve Sustainable Development Goal
than present. There used to be heavy snowfall of quality education by improving access
in the hilly areas near their place. But now a to education for children, especially girls.
days the hills seldom receive snow fall and Identify five challenges the village might
winters are either warmer or some days it’s encounter in implementing this goal.
extremely chilling.
21. Goal 10 of SDG is reducing inequalities.
(A) What do you think his grand parents are
What it is and how this can be achieved?
referring to with respect to SDGs.
(B) Give one reason for these climatic 22. Briefly describe the 5Ps of SDG as stated by
changes. the General Assembly.

50 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL
(a) Clean Water and Sanitation
Objective Qs 1 mark (b) Gender Equality
23. Choose the option which defines sustainable (c) Population
development. (d) Reduced Inequalities
(a) Taking care of future generations 27. Which of the following sources of energy is
(b) Taking care of only ourselves from a renewable source?
(c) Taking care of ourselves and the future (a) Solar energy (b) Wood
generations (c) Coals (d) Petrol
(d) Well-being of all

24. Which organisation has made the Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
Sustainable Development Goals? 28. What is the meaning of sustainable
(a) United Nations development?
(b) League of Nations
(c) UNICEF 29. Explain the importance of education towards
(d) World Health Organisation sustainable development.

25. How many sustainable development goals Long Qs 4 marks

are given by the United Nations?
(a) 18 (b) 17 30. Why do you think the United Nations has
(c) 15 (d) 20 made the 17 sustainable development
Goals?
26. Choose the option which is NOT a
sustainable development goal according to 31. List some ways in which we can use
United Nations. resources sensibly.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

(a) UNICEF
Objective Qs 1 mark
(b) League of Nations
32. In total, how many SDGs were adopted by (c) United Nations
the United Nations in 2015 as a universal (d) World Health Organization
call to action to end poverty, protect the [CBSE SQP 2023]
planet, and ensure that by 2030 all people
enjoy peace and prosperity? Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
(a) 13 (b) 11
(c) 17 (d) 19 36. Mention any two ways to get clean and
[CBSE 2024] affordable energy. [CBSE 2024]

33. An economy is called Green economy when 37. List down any four factors causing ecological
it is based on the principles of ............... . imbalance. [CBSE SQP 2019]
(a) understanding 38. How can an individual contribute to
(b) development Sustainable Development Goals?
(c) sustainable development [CBSE SQP 2020]
(d) truth and Justice
[Mod. CBSE SQP 2019] 39. Give any one practice/sustainable process
that is being used to help preserve the
34. According to the concept of sustainable environment. [CBSE Term-2 SQP 2022]
development, the environment and
development are ............... issues. 40. Give an example of large scale production of
solar power in India.
(a) inseparable (b) separate
(c) independent (d) none of these [CBSE Term-2 SQP 2022]
[CBSE SQP 2020]
41. “Green economy promotes sustainable
35. Name the organization that has the development”. Justify the statement.
Sustainable Development Goals? [CBSE SQP 2023]

Green Skills - II 51
 PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
Objective Questions correct explanation of (A).
1. The Agenda for sustainable development (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
adopted by General Assembly is to be (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
achieved by:
5. Assertion (A): Social inclusion is one of the
(a) 2015 (b) 2020
challenges in implementation
(c) 2100 (d) 2030 1
of SDG’s.
2. Neha is working on a sustainable Reason(R): India has a lot of diversities
development project in India. She needs to from cultural to lingual to
coordinate with the organization responsible regional and climate. 1
for supervising and guiding Sustainable 6. Assertion (A): Factors like biodiversity loss,
Development Goals (SDG) initiatives. To degradation of water, dry
ensure that her project aligns with national lands etc., are a threat to
priorities and receives appropriate support, peace and prosperity.
whom should she contact? Reason(R): Environmental changes
(a) Central Statistics Office (CSO) threaten to reverse the
(b) NITI Aayog achievements to date. 1
(c) Election Commission
(d) Block Development Officer (BDO) 1 Case Based Questions
3. Which of the following can be considered as 7. For centuries Indians worshipped their rivers
scope for quality education? and trees and protected them. Reusing
(I) Defining role and responsibilities of things until could be, not wasting food, giving
institutions at various levels of education. leftovers to the domestic animals was the key
(II) Demographic information regarding of every Indian Household. General Assembly,
availability of various educational in September 2015 has adopted a similar
institutions. Agenda.
(III) By assigning some responsibilities to (A) What name has been given to it?
government higher education institutions (B) Which goal calls for protecting rivers and
like IISc, IITs etc. other natural elements?
(IV) Giving a clear definition of quality
(C) Which goal emphasizes on reuse of
education at each level separately things?
(V) Donating used books.
(a) (I), (II), (III), (IV) & (V) (D) List any one way in which you as an
(b) (I), (II), (IV) & (V) individual can contribute in SDG. 4
(c) (I), (II) & (IV)
(d) None of these 1 Short Questions
4. Which of the following is a green skill in 8. There are rules for proper discarding of
waste management? waste electronics. Why? 2
(a) Increase landfill areas
(b) Not using resource conservation concept 9. How can be the challenge of data collection
(c) Use of unsustainable disposal methods to monitor progress overcome? 2
(d) Encouraging recycling and composting
10. Name the 5P’s of sustainable development.
practices. 1
2
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these Long Questions
questions selecting the appropriate option
given: 11. How are Food, Energy and Water related? 4
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the 12. Describe briefly the GOAL 4 Quality
correct explanation of (A). Education as discussed in SDG. 4

52 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (c)
Key
1. (c) Not focusing on growth and development rise in the sea levels is due to our actions
at all and practices of past. All the technological
Explanation: Sustainable development means developments have costed us our valuable
to understand that growth, development, environment. The solution for all these was
innovation need to be focused along with sought in finding ways to develop but not at
protection of natural environment to achieve the cost of our natural environment.
long term stability.
6. (c) Responsible consumption and production
2. (b) Both (b) and (c)
Explanation: Involvement of private sectors Related Theory
in different ways for SDG’s will help fight the  Some of the points to achieve the Goal of Responsible
financial deficit. Consumption and production can be:
• More use of seasonal produce from local farms
3. (d) PMSYM • Reducing the use of disposables
Explanation: Swachh Bharat Scheme aims • Donating used clothes, books, furniture etc.
at making citizens aware of sanitisation and • Recycle whatever can be
cleanliness importance. It aims at spreading • Reuse bags and products that can easily be
awareness about not littering garbage and • Using more plant based diet as meat and poultry
using environment friendly products. Make production takes up more resources.
in India is a scheme to encourage domestic • Preserve the leftovers for use in a day or two
manufacturing and attract investments in the rather than letting them to rot away.
country. Skill India aims at training youth to be
7. (b) Data being unavailable at sub-national
skill ready for the job sector. PMSYM provides
level
pension benefits to the old aged in non-
Explanation: Data at sub-national levels is
organised sector. incomplete or unavailable.
4. (b) (I) & (II) only 8. (d) Our actions must not seek partnerships or
good governance.
Related Theory
 To achieve the target of good health and well-being Related Theory
as an individual we must:
 Social equality refers to gender and other such
 Not drink and drive
equalities. Social equity means no poverty, zero
 Not drive too fast
hunger, quality education for all and good health
 Drive considerately
and well-being. Lowering of Carbon emission
 Not use mobile phones while driving
requires adopting affordable and cleaner resources.
5. (d) All of these Eco-innovations involve industrial innovations and
Explanation: Many of today’s major problems infrastructure and developing sustainable cities and
such as climate change, global warming and communities.

Green Skills - II 53
 9. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
Explanation: Environment and development 14.
Bio-degradable Non-biodegradable
go hand in hand. The environmental changes
that we are facing today are due to the (1) Bio-degradable Non-biodegradable
technological developments of the past. products are products can not
those that be decomposed by
Related Theory decompose easily natural agents.
 In order for development to be sustainable and fight by natural agents.
the challenges to peace and prosperity, taking care
of environment has become very important. (2) These do not These remain in the
remain in the environment forever
10. (c) (A) is true but (R) is false. environment for and release harmful
Explanation: Turning off lights and using very long and pollutants into the
natural light is not only beneficial for health are converted atmosphere and
but is also important for the cause of into some useful land.
environmental protection and SDG. product like soil,
manure etc.
11. (A) Ayushmaan Bharat
(B) Good Health and well being (Goal 3) 15. This goal targets at reducing the proportion
(C) (1) Don’t drink and drive of unemployment, education and training
(2) Don’t use mobile phones while driving amongst youth and that too sustainably.
or walking on the road.
(3) Keep a check on your speed 16. FEW-N is Food-Energy-Water Nexus. It is the
(4) Drive sensibly interdependency of these three resources and
(5) Practice yoga, meditation and exercise the increase in their demand due to increase in
regularly the population globally, growing economies,
change in dietary habits etc.
(D) (1) Due to geographical, social and
economic diversities in a country like 17. Collecting data for all SDG’s sometimes
India implementing the related policies becomes practically impossible because
is itself a challenge. many times incomplete data is collected
(2) The diversification and vastness of or is unavailable. At sub-national levels
India demands for large investments to data collected is missing. Data collected is
achieve the goals sometimes general and not specific.
(3) To check the progress achieved
in implementation of the policies,
18. Social, economic, ecological and governmental.
monitoring and data collection is 19. By Peace in 5P’s of SDG UN expresses its
very important. Getting correct and determination to foster peaceful societies
complete data from every nook and free of fear and violence because peace and
corner is also a challenge. sustainable development co-exist.
12. (A) Climate action 20. Here are the challenges faced by the village
(B) Large scale emission of GHG’s (Green in implementing the goal of providing quality
House Gases) education:
(C) SDG’s aim at sustainable development (1) Limited Infrastructure: The village may
together in harmony with the environment. lack proper school buildings, classrooms,
Climatic changes are creating a havoc and furniture, and educational resources,
all these are due to the developmental making it challenging to offer quality
activities in the past. To stop further education.
damage to the climate and to protect (2) Teacher Shortages: There might not be
the flora and fauna of a place along with enough qualified teachers available in the
keeping in pace of the development it has village to provide adequate instruction
been adopted as SDG. to all students, leading to overcrowded
(D) The variations in climatic conditions of classrooms or inexperienced educators.
the country require preparing different (3) Cultural Barriers: Societal norms or
schemes for different areas. cultural beliefs may discourage certain
13. Understanding the scope of the goal involves groups, especially girls, from pursuing
assessing factors like food availability, access, education, leading to disparities in access
utilisation, and stability within a community, and enrollment rates.
ensuring comprehensive action towards (4) Socio-economic Factors: Economic
achieving zero hunger. constraints and poverty could force

54 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 children to work instead of attending (4) Understanding other’s circumstances
school, depriving them of educational (5) Being helpful
opportunities and perpetuating a cycle of
poverty. 22. The 5 Ps are:
(5) Accessibility Issues: The village's remote (1) Prosperity: To provide prosperous and
location and lack of transportation joyous lives to everyone but altogether
infrastructure may make it difficult for ensuring that this occurs in harmony with
students to commute to school regularly, nature.
leading to irregular attendance and (2) Partnership: To mobilise all the required
dropout rates. resources with the participation of all the
countries and their people.
21. Reducing inequalities is defined as social, (3) Peace: To ensure development of
political and economic inclusion for all, peaceful, just and societies that inculcate
irrespective of age, gender, race, caste, religion
inclusiveness for all.
or economic or other status. This can be
(4) Planet: To ensure the safety of the planet
achieved by
by taking immediate actions on climate
(1) Being open minded and not judging others
change and sustainable production and
for their differences.
(2) Learning from others who are different consumption.
from us. (5) People: To ensure well-being for all by
(3) Listening to other’s opinions ending poverty and hunger.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

Answer 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (a)
Key
23. (c) Taking care of ourselves and the future • Climate action
generations • Life below water
Explanation: Sustainable development aims • Life on land
at developing in a manner so as to meet the • Peace and justice strong institutions
needs of the present generation while leaving • Partnerships to achieve the goal
the scope for the future generations to meet
their needs. 26. (c) Population

24. (a) United Nations 27. (a) Solar Energy

28. Sustainable development aims at a holistic
Related Theory approach towards development. The main
 UN General Assembly adopted the agenda of purpose of sustainable development is to
sustainable development based on the principle of adopt long term stability of the economy and
‘leaving no one behind’.
protect our natural environment as well.
25. (b) 17 29. Education helps in becoming aware about our
responsibilities as good citizen.
Related Theory
 United Nations has defined 17 goals and 169 targets 30. Sustainable development is essential for
to achieve them. maintaining a balance between our economic,
Following are the 17 Sustainable Development social and environmental needs. We should lead
Goals as adopted by the UN. a life that so that it doesn’t waste the resources
• No poverty we have. The new technological developments
• Good health and well-being should be such that they conserve and protect
• Zero hunger our planet and environment. But altogether
• Quality education the pace of development cannot be curtailed
• Gender equality
innovation, development and economic and
• Clean water and sanitation
• Affordable and clean energy social issues must be also considered, hence
• Decent work and economic growth an inclusive approach towards development,
• Industry, innovation and infrastructure independent ecological, economic, social and
• Reduced inequality technological issues was seen as the need of
• Sustainable cities and communities the hour. For this UN has made 17 sustainable
• Responsible consumption and production development goals.

Green Skills - II 55
 31. (1) We should reuse paper, glass, plastic, water, (4) Switching off fans, light and other gadgets
etc. when not needed.
(5) Not wasting food.
(2) Buy only those things that are needed. (6) Turning to vegetarian food choices as
(3) Donating the things that we are no longer producing meat and poultry consumes
using to the needy. more resources.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

Answer 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a)
Key
32. (c) 17 (2) Implementing energy efficiency measures
Explanation: The SDGs or Sustainable such as upgrading to energy-efficient
Development Goals are a set of 17 global appliances and technologies.
objectives established by the United Nations 37. Sustainable development can happen only
to address global challenges such as poverty, when each one of us works towards it. One has
inequality, climate change, environmental to become a responsible environment citizen
degradation, peace, and justice. These who can protect the environment through
goals provide a framework for countries, our efforts, who can help others to get quality
organisations, and individuals to work towards education, by reducing inequalities in the
a more sustainable and equitable world by society etc.
2030.
38. One such practice is : organic farming/
33. (c) sustainable development vermicomposting etc.
Explanation: A green economy is based on the 39. Charanka - Gujarat Solar Park
principles of sustainable development. It aims
to integrate environmental considerations 40. (c) United Nations
into economic growth while ensuring the Explanation: The Sustainable Development
responsible use of natural resources. Goals (SDGs) were established by the United
Nations (UN) as a universal call to action to
34. (a) inseparable end poverty, protect the planet, and ensure
Explanation: Development and environment prosperity for all by 2030.
go hand in hand. We cannot think of sustainable
development if we don’t protect our Related Theory
environment. Ruthless development without  The SDGs are a set of 17 interconnected goals,
caring for environment will lead to a scarcity of addressing a range of global challenges. The UN
resources and hence a reversal of development member states have committed to these goals,
will be experienced this results in the further the implementation and success of the SDGs
depend on the collective efforts of governments,
impoverishment of the environment.
businesses, non-governmental organisations (NGOs),
35. (1) Destruction of forests and individuals worldwide. Many organisations,
both public and private, align their strategies and
(2) Industrialisation initiatives with the SDGs
(3) Urbanisation
(4) Large scale use of pesticides 41. The focus of green growth strategies is
(5) Overgrazing (Any four) ensuring that natural assets can deliver their
full economic potential on a sustainable basis.
36. Two ways to get clean and affordable energy That potential includes the provision of critical
are: life support services – clean air and water, and
(1) Adapting renewable energy sources like the resilient biodiversity needed to support
solar, wind or hydroelectric power. food production and human health.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

56 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
(III) Multiple columns
Objective Qs 1 mark
(IV) Linked objects
1. Hovering mouse over these and then clicking (V) Hyperlinked objects
applies style using Fill format Mode in OO
Option
Writer.
(a) Paragraph (a) (I) (b) (I) and (III)
(b) Character (c) (I) and (V) (d) None of these
(c) Word 7. Kritika is formatting a document in a word
(d) Paragraph, Frame and Page processing software and needs to define
2. A set of readymade shapes available in OO specific properties for indentation and
Writer to be used in our documents: numbering style for a list she is creating.
(a) Word art (b) Drawing objects To ensure the list appears consistently
(c) Auto Shapes (d) Clip art throughout the document with the
desired formatting, she needs to select the
3. Selecting an object and then dragging and appropriate style setting. Where does she
dropping it into Styles and Formatting define the indentation and numbering style
window: properties?
(a) is not possible (a) Page Style (b) Frame Style
(b) creates a new style based on the dropped (c) Character Style (d) List Style
object
Question No. 8 to 10 consist of two statements
(c) updates an existing style
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
(d) applies an existing style to the dragged questions selecting the appropriate option
object
given:
4. When an image in a word processor (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
document is selected ................ are shown correct explanation of (A).
around it. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
(a) borders (b) frame correct explanation of (A).
(c) dots (d) tiny squares (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
5. Aditi is working on a document in OpenOffice (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
Writer and wants to quickly format the text
using different styles. To do this efficiently, 8. Assertion (A): Bhumi inserted an image
she decides to open the Styles and in her document. Later
Formatting window using …………..... . when she opened it she
(a) F1 (b) F5 found that the image has
been modified, although
(c) F11 (d) F4
she hadn’t opened her
6. Frames in a word processor document document after creating it.
cannot contain: Reason(R): If the source file of an
(I) Text image linked to a document
(II) Pictures is modified, the changes
High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 57

 become apparent in the taking a lot of time. How can she do it
document’s image also. quickly?

9. Assertion (A): An existing document can be (B) There are 20 programs in her assignment
updated to a new template that will take up around 30 pages. She
by just selecting the change wants an easy accessibility of each
template option. program. How will this be possible?

Reason(R): Template management (C) How can she prepare the Index of her
dialog box is used to set a assignment file?
default template. (D) On front page of her project file, she
wants to add logo of her school at top
10. Assertion (A): Cropping means removing a followed by other details. Which wrap
random section of an image. text option she should use here?
Reason(R): When Keep Scale is selected,
then cropping would not Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
change the scale of the
picture.
13. What do you understand by Character
Styles?
Case Based Qs 4 mark 14. Kanika wants to add an image to her
document. In which scenario adding a linked
11. Manas is preparing report for his science
image will be disadvantageous.
project. His teacher has asked him to prepare a
printed report of minimum 10 pages. She also 15. Briefly explain the importance of Styles and
has given a format that all the students need Formatting Window.
to follow. Manas wasn’t present on the day
the teacher explained the format. So his friend 16. Radhika wants to create title page of her
sent him his report and asked him to see the project work in OO Writer. She needs the title
format. to be shadowed and shown as stretched.
Which option she should use for this? Is it
(A) Manas wasn’t able to understand all the
possible that the title of her project be filled
types of formatting his friend has used.
with a picture? How?
Suggest him a way so that his document
is easily formatted as per his friend’s 17. How is a document different from a
report. template?
(B) Manas needs to add image of a
18. Mr. Sunil is preparing notes on Windows OS
microscope as background of every
for his students in OO Writer. He wants to
page. How can he make an image as
add the icon of recycle bin along with the
background that should also get printed.
text that explains what Recycle Bin is. Name
(C) How can he prepare the index for his the option that will help him place the icon
project? in the line of text.
(D) When they submitted the project the
teacher asked them to add some more 19. Explain what is meant by hierarchy of
topics in their project. How will he now headings.
change the index?
Long Qs 4 marks
12. Deepanshi is preparing her Computer
assignment on Flow chart in Word Processor. 20. Explain briefly the following properties of
She needs to draw all the flowcharts of the drawing objects.
programs she has written in Python. (A) Brightness (B) Contrast

Help her with some of the queries she has. (C) Transparency (D) Colour mode

(A) She has drawn two flowcharts but put 21. Abhay is using multiple images in his
them in wrong serial order. Now she document. He comes across four options for
wants to move the first flowchart after anchoring an image. Can you explain all the
the second but moving each shape is four options?

58 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL
32. In page layout documents, you can arrange
Objective Qs 1 mark ................... like text boxes and graphics.
22. Styles menu (from sidebar) in Writer provide (a) objects (b) frames
options to work on (c) elements (d) data
(a) Paragraph Styles (b) Frame Styles 33. Character styles are often integrated in
(c) Page Styles (d) All of the above .................... style.
(a) text (b) page
23. To remove the applied paragraph styling in
(c) frame (d) paragraph
the ToC, select the outline level in the levels
list box, and then click the ................ button. 34. ................... allows to apply style at different
(a) paragraph list (b) preview places in the document.
(c) OK (d) Default (a) Styles and formatting
(b) Fill Format
24. What is style template in LibreOffice Writer?
(c) Templates
(a) Pre-determined form and mode of
(d) Fill mode
document file
(b) One kind of model style 35. Predefined Style ...................... be updated by
(c) One type of document Drag and Drop method.
(d) Cluster of documents in Writer (a) cannot (b) should
(c) can (d) none of these
25. Which of the following gives the status of
your document like page numbers, number 36. The text or image which appears faintly in
of pages? the background of a page is called ................ .
(a) Status bar (b) Standard toolbar (a) watermark (b) trade mark
(c) Formatting (d) Title bar (c) copyright (d) embossing

26. Which of the following can be used to access 37. JPG or JPEG in image format stands for
a style menu? .................. .
(a) F11 function key (a) Joint Photographic Experts Group
(b) Sidebar Menu (b) Joint Picture Experts Group
(c) Formatting toolbar (c) Joint Photographic Experts Graph
(d) Joint Photographic Experts General
(d) All of these

27. A ................. is a collection of different formats. 38. In Drawing Object Properties toolbar,
Grouping options provided are ................... .
(a) document (b) style
(a) Exit Group (b) Ungroup
(c) table (d) frame
(c) Enter Group (d) All of these
28. Proper use of styles improves ................. in a 39. Which of the following is not the correct file
document.
extension for an image file?
(a) formatting (b) consistency (a) GIF (b) JPEG
(c) presentability (d) All of these (c) Odt (d) PNG
29. The first five buttons at the top of the Styles 40. Image toolbar does not provide a tool for
window selectthe category of ..................... . ..................... .
(a) headings (b) document (a) filtering (b) cropping
(c) template (d) style (c) copying (d) flipping
30. Using predefined .................. creates Bookmark 41. To change both brightness and contrast of
in the document. the image ..................... tool can be used.
(a) heading styles (b) numbering (a) Red colour component
(c) bookmarks (d) none of these (b) brightness
(c) contrast
31. On opening a new file .................... style is
used for formatting the document. (d) gamma correction
(a) custom (b) default 42. To simulate the effect of time on picture
(c) no (d) random .................... tool is used.

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 59

 (a) Invert (b) Smooth 52. Which of the following is the correct
(c) Aging (d) Posterise sequence of options to open the Templates
dialog box?
43. ........................ places image at the bottom of
(a) File > Manage Templates > Templates
all objects.
(b) File > Templates > Manage Templates
(a) Arrangement (b) Send to bottom
(c) Send to Back (d) Send to Front (c) Insert > Templates >Manage Templates
(d) Insert > Manage Templates > Templates
44. There are .................... options for aligning an
image horizontally. 53. Which of the following is true about Track
(a) Multiple (b) one Changes feature of Writer?
(c) two (d) three (a) You cannot record a change made in the
document.
45. The .................... handles of image are used for
(b) A comment of a particular author only
rotating it.
can be deleted
(a) side (b) corner
(c) Any change made to the document is
(c) circular (d) centre
permanent.
46. Changing ......................... of an object before (d) None of the above
its creation, retains them throughout the
session. 54. Which of the following is the shortcut key to
start recording the changes being made in
(a) shape (b) size
the document?
(c) brightness (d) properties
(a) Ctrl+Shift+C. (b) Alt+Shift+C
47. Which of the following is NOT true about (c) Ctrl+Alt+C (d) Shift+C+F2
Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography
dialog box? 55. To navigate to the topic from the ToC, press
(a) It has four tabs .................... key while clicking the mouse
(b) On the Type tab, by default, the checkbox button on that topic.
for Protected against Manual Changes (a) Enter (b) Ctrl
option will be selected. (c) Shift (d) F11
(c) The background tab contains options to
change the background colour.
56. If the checkbox for ....................... option is
selected, the ToC is protected from any
(d) None of the above
accidental change.
48. Which of the following tabs is by default (a) Default
active when the Table of Contents, Entries or (b) Protected Against Manual Changes
Bibliography dialog box is opened? (c) Entries
(a) Entries (b) Background
(d) None of these
(c) Styles (d) Type
57. To update the ToC manually, right click and
49. Which of the following is NOT true about select .................. option from the pop up
templates?
menu.
(a) The styles and formatting features can
(a) Update Index (b) Edit Index
be reused.
(c) Delete Index (d) Update ToC
(b) LibreOffice provides online templates
(c) We cannot create our own templates. 58. To find the template that is being used in the
(d) None of the above. current document, select .................... option
from the file menu.
50. Which of the following is the shortcut key to
(a) find (b) create
open the Templates dialog box?
(c) new (d) properties
(a) Ctrl+Alt+N (b) Shift+Ctrl+N
(c) Ctrl+Alt+T (d) Shift+Alt+T 59. The .................. button is clicked in Templates
dialog box to view online templates.
51. Which of the following buttons, in the
Templates dialog box, will be clicked to save (a) Manage Templates
a template displayed in the list of templates? (b) Help
(a) Export (b) Import (c) Browse Online Templates
(c) Move (d) None of the above (d) Browse

60 One Shot Information Technology Class X

Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
72. How headings and sub-headings of a
document differentiated in ToC?
60. Give any four styles supported by Open 73. What is the difference between importing
Office.org.
and exporting a template?
61. List any three methods of inserting images
74. What is the difference between Accept Track
in a text document.
Change and Accept All Tracked Changes
62. What do you understand by the terms: buttons?
(A) Text Wrapping 75. How do we prepare a document for review?
(B) Anchoring
63. Write advantages of using Style over manual Long Qs 4 marks
formatting, for designing a document.
76. Explain any four Graphic filters.
64. What do you understand by custom styles in
LibreOffice writer? 77. Explain Image Cropping.

65. Give two examples, where instead of Style, 78. What is the difference between styles and
using manual formatting will be beneficial. templates?

66. Give one situation, in which you will prefer 79. What are Styles? What are the advantages
to use Fill Format for styling your document. of using styles?

67. What is a digital image? How can you create 80. How can we create our own styles?
one?
81. What are templates? What are the
68. Write factors controlling positioning of an advantages of using templates?
image in a document.
82. What are the benefits and drawbacks of
69. What is the need of table of contents? grouping drawing objects?

70. What will happen if the ‘Protected Against 83. How is linking of an image different from
Manual Changes’ option is not selected in embedding? Give a situation in which you
the Type tab of Table of Contents, Index or would prefer to link an image.
Bibliography dialog box?
84. How is resizing of image different from
71. What do you mean by customization of ToC? cropping it?

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

OR
Objective Qs 1 mark
Gaurav has inserted an image in a document.
85. Symbol option is available under ............... He wants to remove the unwanted area
group in the Insert tab in word document. of the image. Which option of the word
(a) Illustrations (b) Symbols processor he will use to complete the task?
(c) Media (d) Text (a) Clip art (b) Cut
[CBSE SQP 2019] (c) Crop (d) Contrast
86. ............... refers to the vertical or horizontal [CBSE 2020]
placement of a graphic in relation to the 88. A .............. is a model that you use to create
chosen anchor point.
other documents.
(a) Alignment (b) Footer
(a) Styles (b) Template
(c) Margin (d) Headings
(c) Wizard (d) Sample
[CBSE SQP 2020]
[CBSE SQP 2021, 2020]
87. Fatima has inserted a picture in a document.
But she wants to cut off a part of the picture. 89. When you apply a .............. you apply a group
Which option she should use to accomplish of formatting effects together in one single
the task? step.
(a) Cut (b) Copy (a) effect (b) style
(c) Crop (d) Layout (c) template (d) format
[CBSE SQP 2020] [CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021]

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 61

 90. To repeat the graphic across the entire 97. Which of the following Graphic filter is used
background area, we need to select option to increase the contrast of an image in a
in word processor. document?
(a) Tile (b) Position (a) Smooth (b) Sharpen
(c) Stretch (d) Area (c) Remove Noise (d) Invert
[CBSE SQP 2024] [CBSE 2023]

91. .............. is particularly useful when creating 98. In a document, .............. is used to apply
a watermark or when wrapping the image a style to many different areas quickly
without having to go back to the styles and
in the background in a document.
formatting window and double-click every
(a) Transparency (b) Fill time.
(c) Filters (d) Crop (a) Fill format mode
[CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021] (b) Formatting window
92. .............. controls how graphics are stacked (c) Painter mode
upon each other or relative to the text. (d) Text wrapping
(a) Arrangement (b) Alignment [CBSE Term-1 2021]
(c) Anchoring (d) Wrapping 99. In a word processor, .............. option is
[CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021] selected for a scaled resizing of an image.
(a) Keep ratio (b) Original Size
93. Prisha is a book editor. She wants to change
(c) Image Size (d) Relative
the indentation of all paragraphs, and
[CBSE SQP 2022]
change the font of all titles in the book.
Which feature she should use to make the OR
task easy? Jagriti has inserted an image in a document.
She wants to resize the image. Which option
(a) Styles (b) Templates
of the word processor image format should
(c) Table of content (d) Consolidating be selected to let the two dimensions (height
[CBSE Term–1 SQP 2021] and width) change so that the proportion is
maintained, allowing for a scaled resizing?
94. ................. controls all aspects of a paragraph's (a) Keep Ratio (b) Keep Aspect
appearance, such as text alignment, tab
(c) Crop (d) Contrast
stops, line spacing, and borders, and can
include character formatting. [CBSE Term–1 2021]
(a) Page Style (b) Character Style 100. It is a reference point for the graphics which
(c) Cell Style (d) Paragraph Style is created while positioning any image. This
point could be the page, or frame where
[CBSE 2023]
the object is either a paragraph, or even a
95. How many levels of headings does Open character in a word processor.
Office Writer evaluate to build the Table of (a) Wrap Text (b) Alignment
contents? (c) Anchoring (d) BookMark
(a) 8 (b) 9 [CBSE SQP 2022]
(c) 10 (d) 12
101. John has written a book consisting of fifteen
[CBSE SQP 2022] chapters. He wanted to make the index of
the book. Suggest him the option used to
96. Reema has created a pamphlet on 'Tour to
create the index automatically in a word
West India'. She has inserted many images
processor.
to make it more presentable but the size
(a) Tables (b) Mail Merge
of images is occupying a lot of space. Her
friend has suggested her to reduce the size (c) Columns (d) Table of Content
of images. Which of the following options [CBSE SQP 2022]
will help her in doing the task without losing
102. Which one is NOT the tab of the insert/index
any content of the image? Table Window of Writer Document?
(a) Recolor (b) Docking (a) Entries (b) Background
(c) Resize (d) Rotate (c) Style (d) Row
[CBSE 2023] [CBSE SQP 2023]

62 One Shot Information Technology Class X

103. In the custom styles, each ............. field on the (a) Window style (b) Character style
structure line represents a blank space in a (c) Paragraph style (d) Cell style
document. [CBSE Term-1 2021]
(a) Black (b) White
111. The ............. window shows the types of styles
(c) Blue (d) Yellow
available for the OpenOffice (OpenOffice.
[CBSE SQP 2023] org) component you are using.
104. Saurabh has made an advertisement in (a) Styles and Formatting
Digital Document. He is facing difficulty (b) Font and Formatting
in positioning the images within the text. (c) Insert
Suggest him how he can adjust the image? (d) Edit
(a) Wrap text (b) Crop [CBSE Term-1 2021]
(c) Alignment (d) Layout
112. In Writer, .............. refers to the reference point
[CBSE SQP 2023] for the graphics. This point could be the page
or frame where the object is, a paragraph or
105. .................. includes margins, headers and
even a character.
footers, borders and backgrounds.
(a) Arrangement (b) Anchoring
(a) Page style
(c) Framing (d) Text Wrapping
(b) Paragraph style
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
(c) Character style
(d) Frame style 113. Two other toolbars can be opened from
Picture Toolbar are: the ......... and ......... .
[CBSE Compartment 2021]
(a) Edit picture, Colour picture
106. ...................... is used to format graphic and (b) Format, drawing
text frames, including wrapping type, (c) Graphic Filter toolbar, Colour toolbar
borders and backgrounds.
(d) Floating toolbar, Colour toolbar
(a) Paragraph style (b) Cell style
(c) Frame style (d) Character style 114. Writer’s Table of Contents feature lets you
[CBSE Compartment 2021] build an automated table of contents from
the ...................... in your document.
107. .................. refers to the vertical or horizontal (a) Template (b) Style
placement of a graphic in relation to the (c) Headings (d) Tables
chosen anchor point.
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
(a) Arrangement (b) Anchoring
(c) Text wrapping (d) Alignment 115. Any settings that can be added to or
modified in a document can be saved in
[CBSE Compartment 2021]
a template. Which of the settings below
108. ............... refers to the reference point for the cannot be included in Writer’s Document
graphic. and saved as a template for later use?
(a) Alignment (b) Anchoring (a) Styles for later use
(c) Arrangement (d) Text wrapping (b) Printer settings
[CBSE Compartment 2021] (c) Format and setting of tables
(d) Formula settings
109. Styles help to improve consistency in a
[CBSE Term–1 2021]
document. Identify the style that is used to
format graphic and text frames, including 116. Vineeta has to prepare a report on her
wrapping type, borders, backgrounds and research work in which she needs to include
columns. images with text. Which feature helps to
(a) Numbering (b) Character balance the relation of graphics to the
(c) Graphics (d) Frame surrounding text, which may wrap around
the graphic on one side or both sides, be
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
overprinted behind or in front of the graphic
110. Tanu explained her class that to apply an or treat the graphic as a separate paragraph
existing style, except for ............, position the or character ?
insertion point in the paragraph, frame or (a) Arrangement (b) Alignment
page and then double-click on the name of (c) Table of content (d) Text wrapping
the style in one of these lists. [CBSE Term – 1 2021]

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 63

117. Which of the following features allows one 125. Write steps to insert shape in a word
to apply a group of formats at the same document. [CBSE SQP 2018]
time ?
(a) Fill (b) Styles 126. Sanya is working on Word document. She
has inserted graphics and wants to use
(c) Images (d) Drag and Drop
Wrap text with graphics.
[CBSE 2024]
(A) Where can she find text wrapping?
118. In Writer, styles and formatting option is (B) List any two text wrapping options
available under ................... menu. available in a word processing software.
(a) Insert (b) Tools
[Mod. CBSE SQP 2019]
(c) Format (d) Window
[CBSE 2024] 127. What is the utility of text wrapping in a
document? [CBSE SQP 2020]
119. Gaurav is creating a report in Writer. The
image gets embedded in his document 128. Differentiate between Keep Scale and Keep
whenever he drags and drops the image and Image Size options while cropping an image
the document size increases. Suggest a way in a document. [CBSE 2023]
to link the image file instead of embedding
it. 129. Give any two characteristics of a template in
(a) Drag and drop the image. OpenOffice Writer. [CBSE 2023]
(b) Hold down the Ctrl key while draggging. 130. State any two purposes of using Templates
(c) Hold down the Shift key while dragging in a word document. [CBSE SQP 2023]
the image.
(d) Hold down the Ctrl and Shift key while 131. What do you understand by Anchoring in
dragging and dropping the image. Word Processor? [CBSE SQP 2023]
[CBSE 2024] 132. Write the main steps to group drawing
120. Resizing a ................... may badly affect the objects in Writer. [CBSE 2024]
resolution of an image.
(a) Vector image (b) Raster image
(c) CAD image (d) Coloured image Long Qs 4 marks
[CBSE 2024]
133. Elaborate four different types of styles which
121. In Writer, you can create your own template can be provided in a Word Processor.
in ................... ways. [CBSE SQP 2020]
(a) One (b) Two
(c) Three (d) Four [CBSE 2024] 134. Explain the following terms with respect to
positioning the graphics in a document:
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks (A) Arrangement
(B) Text Wrapping [CBSE 2023]
122. What are document templates? State the
purpose of using document template. 135. What do you understand by the term Table
[CBSE SQP 2018] of Contents? List the characteristics of a
good ‘Table of content’ in a word processor.
123. What do you understand by Style?
[CBSE SQP 2023]
[CBSE 2018]
136. Write down the process for resizing an
124. What do you mean by grouping object?
image. [CBSE Compartment 2021]
[CBSE SQP 2018]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
2. Abhishek is designing a newsletter in a
Objective Questions word processor and wants to add various
1. In OO Writer to copy styles form an existing elements to make it visually appealing. He
template or document into our current plans to include text, images, and other
document .............. option is used. media to enhance the content. While most
(a) Load Styles (b) Update Styles elements can be easily inserted, he realized
(c) Copy Styles (d) Create Styles 1 that one type of media is not typically

64 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 supported directly within a word processor
Case Based Questions
document. Which of the following elements
cannot be directly inserted by him into a 7. Parishi has just joined an office as an office
word processor document? assistant. She was asked to create a document
(a) Scanned pictures (b) Photographs that has many images and company’s logo
(c) Bitmaps (d) Video clips 1 too. She formatted the document so well that
her boss asked her to format all the documents
3. Siddhant was telling his mother that he from then onwards similarly.
wants to add a page at the beginning of (A) What she should do so as to save her
his book that lists all the chapters and time in formatting future documents as
section titles along with their starting page per the sample document?
numbers. What is Siddhant talking about? (B) Parishi has to create another document
(a) Index Page (b) Header and Footer but not according to the template.
(c) Template (d) Table of Content 1 Although she would like that the images
have the same style as that in template.
4. Mahima is creating a document where
each page has a different style. As she is How is this possible?
reviewing the document she wants to check (C) Parishi has created a very long document
the style name of each page. Where can she of around 55 pages. Now she wants that
find this easily? the style on her third and eleventh page
(a) Status bar (b) Task bar be same as that of the fifty-fifth page.
(c) Ribbon (d) Nowhere 1 Which option she should use here?
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements. (D) In some of the paragraphs of her
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these document she would like to add some
questions selecting the appropriate option given: different formatting to some of the text,
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the than the rest of the paragraph. Which
correct explanation of (A). type of style she should choose here? 4
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A). Short Questions
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. 8. What is a text box? Why is it used in a
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. document? 2

5. Assertion (A): Snigdha added a text box 9. Samira is preparing her social studies project
in her document. Now she using a word processor. Her elder brother
tells her to add heading and subheadings in
wants to change its fill
her project. Why do you think he told her to
colour, so she needs to click
do so? 2
on the text box.
10. Mahima has inserted an image in her
Reason(R): The properties of a drawing document. Now she is confused which text
object can be changed wrapping option should she choose. Help
directly from the Style and her by explaining what is Wrap Through. 2
Formatting window. 1

6. Assertion (A): Khushi has added six levels

Long Questions
of headings in her document 11. List two advantages of adding an image link
that she created in OO to a document rather than adding the image
Writer so that she can easily itself. 4
create a ToC.
12. Briefly explain the following colour modes
Reason(R): By default only three levels as used in OO Writer.
of heading are visible in (A) Default (B) Grayscale
table of contents. 1 (C) Black/White (D) Watermark 4

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 65

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (d)
Key
1. (d) Paragraph, Frame and Page 7. (d) List Style
Explanation: Character Styles are applied
Related Theory on digits, characters, individual letters and
 To apply styles to a set of characters using the Fill
symbols. Frames are added to a document
Format Mode select the characters.
whenever an object is added. Frame styles are
2. (c) Auto Shapes included to add variety. Page Style is applied
on the whole page. Properties like page margin,
Related Theory borders etc. can be set using the page styles.
 In OO Writer two types of graphics can be included in List style is applied on the lists, both bulleted
a document, these are drawing objects and pictures.
and numbered.
Drawing objects include AutoShapes, graphic Text
Art, Lines and Curves.
8. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
Caution
 Graphic Text Art is similar to Word Art in MS Word. Explanation: Whenever an image is linked to a
document, it is not saved with the document.
3. (b) creates a new style based on the dropped Only its link is saved. Next time when the
object document is opened the image is loaded from
its source file.
Related Theory
 Other ways to create a style are: 9. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
• Load style option
Explanation: An existing document can
• Update style option
be updated to a new template but for this
4. (d) Tiny Squares following steps need to be followed.
Explanation: Whenever an object is clicked it (1) Open the existing document and create a
gets selected. This is shown by tiny squares new blank document with the required
around it, called sizing handles. template.
(2) Now select the complete document, copy
Related Theory
it and then paste it in the new blank
 These sizing handles are used to move, resize, and
rotate an object. document.
(3) Save this new document with a different
5. (c) F11 name.
6. (d) None of these (4) Now a copy of the existing document
Explanation: A frame is used to create layout – based on the new template is available.
intensive documents. A frame is automatically
added when an object is inserted in a 10. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
document, however these frames can always Explanation: Cropping means removing
be formatted. unwanted area from an image starting from

66 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 its boundary. It removes continuous section of 17.
Template Document
an image.
Templates are blue Document contains
11. (A) Manas should save his friend’s document print of a document. specific information.
as template and then make it as template They have generic A document can be
for his document. content that needs created from a tem-
to be used in multiple plate.
(B) The transparency of the image should be
documents.
set to 100%.
(C) Using the Table of Contents option. 18. Anchoring the icon as character will serve his
(D) To update the table of contents, right click purpose.
within the table anywhere, and select 19. Headings in a document must be defined
Update Index/Table from the popup menu, clearly so that the titles, chapters and main
the index will be updated. headings should have a higher level of heading
and sections and sub-sections should be
12. (A) By grouping all the shapes of the flow defined using lower level of headings. This
chart and then using cut and paste option. gives a well-defined structure to the document
(B) She can add each question number as and is called hierarchy of headings.
heading and the corresponding code and 20. (A) Brightness: It describes the overall
flowchart as sub-heading. lightness or darkness of an image.
(C) She can create a table of contents. (B) Contrast describes the difference in the
(D) Before brightness of various objects.
(C) Transparency: It describes the visibility
13. The group of attributes that are applied to of the background of an image behind it.
individual letter, digit or symbol is called The more the transparency of an image,
character style. These attributes can be font more will be its background visible behind
style, size, colour or bold, italics and underline. the image. It can have value between 0 –
100%. A fully transparent image can act as
14. If she wants to send her document over the a watermark.
network then a linked file is not useful as then (D) Colour Mode: It describes the way
she will have to send the image file too and tell the colours of an image are displayed.
the recipient where to keep that image file so Following modes can be used default, gray
that the link remains meaningful for the word scale, black/white, watermark.
processor. 21. An image can be anchored as following four
types:
15. Styles and Formatting window is a dockable
window. It has all the styles related information. (1) To Page: When an image is anchored to a
page its position with respect to the page
Managing various styles in a document is
margins remains the same.
done using it. It provides quick access to
(2) To Paragraph: This most used option
various formatting options, making it easier
anchors an image to a paragraph so the
to maintain consistency and professional image always moves with it.
appearance throughout the document. (3) To Character: When an image is anchored
16. Font work gallery in Drawing toolbar. to a character it moves with the character.
(4) As Character: An image that is anchored
Yes, the title can be filled with a picture. For this
as a character is placed as a normal
Fill Style option of the drawing toolbar can be character within the text, thus affecting the
used. height of the text line.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

22. (d) 23. (d) 24. (b) 25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (b)

Answer 32. (a) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (c) 41. (d)
Key 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (b) 46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (b)
52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (c)

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 67

 22. (d) All of the above 29. (d) Style
Explanation: Writer gives six style options i.e. Explanation: The first five buttons in the styles
Page, paragraph, Character, Frame, List and window are used to select a category of style.
Table. All the available style options can be Clicking on each category shows list of related
accessed in following ways: styles.
(1) From Style option in menu bar 30. (a) heading styles
(2) Using Style Drop Down List box Explanation: In the navigation pane a
document’s headings are displayed in
(3) Using Style submenu from the side bar
hierarchical structure. These can be used to
(4) Using F11 shortcut key browse the document quickly.
23. (d) Default 31. (b) default
Explanation: To apply a style to a particular
32. (a) objects
level of the ToC, click and select a particular
Explanation: Text boxes, graphics, images etc.,
level from the levels list box and then select are called objects.
the desired style from the Paragraph Styles list
box. Clicking OK will now assign the style to 33. (d) paragraph
the selected level. Explanation: Character style works on block
of characters within a paragraph, hence it
Caution changes style in a paragraph. So, its included
 The Level List box and the Paragraph Styles List often in paragraph styles.
box are available in: Table of Contents, Entries or
34. (b) Fill Format
Bibliography dialog box.
Explanation: To apply same style at different
24. (b) One kind of model style places in a document Fill Format can be used.
It is the second icon from right on the style’s
Explanation: A style in Writer is a template
menu.
that defines formatting of a particular type.
Selecting a particular style quickly formats the 35. (a) Cannot
desired section of the document. Explanation: To create a new style two
methods are used: From Selection and Drag
25. (a) Status bar and Drop. To create a style using Drag and
Drop the formatted text is dragged and
Related Theory dropped in the desired category of the style
 Status Bar is located at the bottom of the window menu. Updating a predefined style in such a
and displays information regarding the current way is not possible.
document. It is also used to conveniently change
36. (a) Watermark
some of the features.

26. (d) All of these Related Theory

 A watermark is printed along with the text when the
Related Theory document is printed. It is used to protect a document
from illegal copying.
 F11 is shortcut key to open Style and Formatting
window. 37. (a) Joint Photographic Experts Group
27. (b) Style
Related Theory
Explanation: A style in Writer or any other
 JPEG is a method of compression for image files so
Word processor is a collection of formats that as to make their sharing easy. Most of the image
can be applied on any element. In OO Writer files produced by digital cameras have this format
styles can be applied on Page, paragraph, and saved with extension .jpeg
frame, tables and list.
38. (d) All of these
28. (b) consistency
Related Theory
Explanation: Styles are predefined formats
 Properties of an object can be changed by right
that can be applied to different elements of a
clicking on the object or using the Drawing Object
document. When similar styles are applied to Properties toolbar. This toolbar is a floating toolbar
similar sections these bring consistency in the and can be used to resize, group, move, rotate and
document. edit objects. The group option has four options under

68 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 it. These are Group, Ungroup, Enter Group and Exit properties before creation is known as setting default
Group. values.

39. (c) Odt 47. (a) It has four tabs

Explanation: ODT is Open Document Text. Explanation: The Table of Contents, Index or
It was created to store data for Open office Bibliography dialog box contains five tabs as
systems. follows:
(1) Type: It is selected by default to insert ToC.
40. (c) copying
(2) Entries: To set styles for various entries in
Explanation: Image toolbar appears whenever
the ToC.
an image is inserted or selected. It has tools to
filter, change image mode, crop, filter, rotate, (3) Styles: To apply the desired styles to the
colour and to make an image transparent. text at each level in the ToC.
(4) Column: It has options to set the number of
41. (d) gamma correction columns in the ToC.
Explanation: In the Image toolbar the colour (5) Background: It has Options to change the
button shows five components; first three of background of the ToC
these are for the primary colours Red, Green
and Blue, fourth and fifth are for Brightness 48. (c) Styles
and Contrast and sixth component is for
49. (c) We cannot create our own templates.
Gamma correction.
Explanation: We can create our templates in
42. (c) Aging Writer using existing documents by saving it as
Explanation: Using the Image toolbar, many template.
filters can be applied to an image. One among
50. (b) Shift+Ctrl+N
them is Aging. On selecting Aging tool from
the Image toolbar, a dialogue box to adjust
Related Theory
parameters appears.
 The templates dialog box is used to manage
43. (c) Send to Back templates. All the available templates, online
templates and customised templates are available
Explanation: When multiple objects overlap
here. Users can edit the existing templates or save
each other Arrangement option is used to a document as template using the template dialog
determine their positions. The six tools for box.
arrangement are: Bring to Front, Forward one,
Back One, Send to Back, To Foreground and To 51. (b) Import
Background.
Related Theory
Related Theory  When the Import button from the Template dialog
 To position images in a document following four box is clicked, the Select Category dialog box opens.
settings can be used: Select a category to save a template in it.
(1) Arrangement (2) Anchoring
52. (b) File > Templates > Manage Templates
(3) Alignment (4) Text Wrapping

44. (d) three Related Theory

Explanation: Alignment option is used to  The shortcut key to open the Templates dialog box is
place the image horizontally or vertically with ctrl+shift+N.
respect to its anchor. There are three different
53. (d) None of the above
alignments, three vertical and three horizontal.

45. (b) corner Related Theory

Explanation: To rotate an image select it and  Track changes is used to collaborate between
click on rotate tool. Four dots called handles multiple users. It helps in commenting, editing and
appear on the four corners of the image. reviewing of documents. If changes are made by a
Whenever mouse is moved on any of these user directly in a document, the original content is
dots rotate symbol is activated. Now dragging lost. But with Track Changes feature following up of
it the image can be rotated as desired. changes and comparing with old document is easy.

46. (d) properties 54. (a) Ctrl+Shift+C

55. (b) Ctrl
Related Theory
 Properties of an object can be modified either at Explanation: Table of Contents is the list of all
the time of creation or after its creation. Modifying headings and sub-headings of the document

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 69

 which are also hyperlinks to the topics of the (3) Documents that use styles are more
documents. So by clicking on the topics of ToC professional looking.
we can jump directly to that topic.
64. LibreOffice has some predefined styles in each
56. (b) Protected Against Manual Changes of the six categories but if user requires these
styles can be modified according to the user’s
Related Theory requirement or new styles can be created.
 When ToC is created the Protected Against Manual These styles that are customised by the user
Changes check box is by default selected. If this are called custom styles.
check box is unselected then the ToC can be changed
directly just like any other normal section of the 65. Manual formatting is beneficial when:
document. (1) only a very small part of the document
needs to be formatted.
57. (a) Update Index
(2) Same formatting is not required anywhere
Explanation: ToC is not updated automatically.
else in the same document or some other
58. (d) Properties document.

66. Fill Format is used for styling a document

Related Theory
when the element to be formatted is scattered
 To create professional looking documents templates at different locations across the document.
are used. For an existing document to check, the
For example Say in an official document
template it is based on Properties option from the
company’s name is to be given in a specific
File menu is clicked. A Properties dialog box opens
that shows properties of the document including the
format at multiple times. In such a case Fill
type and template of the document.
Format can be used.

59. (c) Browse Online Templates 67. Representation of a picture in pixels i.e., finite
sets of digital values is called a digital image. A
Explanation: We can use online templates,
digital image can be stored in various types of
user defined templates or in-built templates
graphics files with extensions such as GIF, JPG,
in OO Writer. To use any of these categories JPEG, PNG, BMP, etc.
first we need to select the template from the
Templates dialog box. Available templates are 68. Positioning of an image is controlled by:
shown in the Templates dialog box. To apply (1) Arrangement
an online template, Browse Online Template (2) Anchoring
button is clicked. (3) Alignment
60. Page style, Character Style, Paragraph Style (4) Text wrapping
and List Style. 69. Table of Contents is required to add an
61. An image can be inserted into a document index of topics of the document. It contains
from: a list of headings and subheadings of the
document which is added at the beginning of
(1) Gallery
the document and acts as hyperlink for the
(2) Using drag and drop document.
(3) Using the Picture dialog box
70. If the ‘Protected Against Manual Changes’
62. (A) Text Wrapping: It refers to the placement option is not selected in the Type tab of Table
of the text with respect to the image. of Contents, Index or Bibliography dialog box
(B) Anchoring: It is the reference point for the then the ToC can be edited manually just like
horizontal / vertical placement of an image. any other section of the document.

63. Using Styles rather than manual formatting 71. Customization of ToC means that we can edit
gives following advantages: the ToC according to our requirements in terms
of Type, Entries, Styles, number of columns and
(1) Using styles to format a document saves
background colour and graphics.
time as individually formatting each and
every section is very time consuming. 72. Headings and subheadings are differentiated
(2) Styles give consistency to the document as by applying different heading styles to
similar elements of a document have same different headings but at same heading styles
formatting. are applied to same level of headings.

70 One Shot Information Technology Class X

73. Importing a Exporting a (2) Style can be A template
Template Template applied on affects the whole
paragraphs, document.
When a template Export template
individual
is downloaded and feature is used to
characters, words,
saved in any file or store the template
pages, frames and
folder, it is imported file in the desired
lists.
so that it is visible in folder.
the list of templates. (3) We can change A template is
the style of specified at the time
74. different parts of a of creating a new
Accept All Tracked document on a go. document.
Accept Track Change
Changes buttons
79. Styles in document formatting refer to
Accept Track change Accept All Tracked predefined combinations of fonts, font sizes,
button is used to Changes button is colours, alignments, and other formatting
accept a tracked used to accept all settings that can be applied to text or objects in
change after the tracked changes a consistent manner throughout a document.
reviewing it. at once
Advantages:
75. To prepare a document for review, Select (1) Consistency: Styles ensure that formatting
Edit → Track Changes → Record option or remains consistent throughout the
document, even when making changes or
the Record Button from the Track Changes
additions.
toolbar. To restrict anyone from not being able
(2) Efficiency: Applying styles allows for quick
to disable the track changes option document
and easy formatting without the need to
needs to be protected with password. manually adjust each element individually.
76. Aging: This filter is used to simulate the effect (3) Time-saving: Styles streamline the
document creation process by enabling
of time on an image. It can be applied several
rapid formatting application to multiple
times to get the desired result. sections simultaneously.
Posterize: It reduces the colours of an image so (4) Global changes: With styles, making
that it looks like a painting. global changes to formatting is simple.
Invert: The brightness values of a grayscale Adjusting one style updates all text or
objects formatted with that style.
image or colour values of a colour image are
(5) Professional appearance: Consistent
inverted when this effect is used.
formatting enhances the document's
Remove Noise: All the single pixels of an image professional appearance, improving
are removed. readability and visual appeal.

77. Image cropping removes the unwanted 80. Creating a new style from a selection:
sections of an image staring from the borders. (1) Open the Styles and Formatting window
It removes only the continuous sections of the and choose the type of style you want
image. To maintain the original scale of an to create.
 In the document, select the item you
image keep scale option should be selected
want to save as a style.
while cropping and to maintain the size of the
 In the Styles and Formatting window,
image keep image size option must be selected.
click on the New Style from Selection
Keep Image Size option will distort or cut the icon.
image but its size would remain the same.
(2) In the Create style dialog, type a name for
78. the new style. The list shows the names of
Styles Templates existing custom styles of the selected type.
(1) Styles are used A template is a blue Click OK to save the new style.
to apply some print that defines (3) Dragging and dropping to create a style:
predefined how a formatted Select some text and drag it to the Styles
formatting document will look and Formatting window. If paragraph
styles are active, the paragraph style will
properties to like.
be added to the list. If character styles are
different parts of a
active, the character style will be added to
document.
the list.

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 71

 81. Templates are pre-designed documents or files Any changes made in Any changes made
that serve as a starting point for creating new the original image file in the original file
documents with a similar format, layout, or are reflected in the are not reflected in
structure. They contain placeholders for text, document the document.
images, and other elements, which can be
customized to suit specific needs. An image can be linked to a document when
the image to be displayed in the document
82. Benefits of grouping objects are: may change in future and updation is required
(1) All the grouped objects behave as a single with every change.
entity without affecting their size and
position. 84. Resizing Cropping
(2) Changes applied on one shape works on all Resizing means Cropping refers to
objects of the group. reducing or enlarging removing some
(3) All the objects now can be moved together. the image to fit unwanted portions
Drawbacks of grouping objects are: a place in the of the image from
(1) Changes can’t be applied to a single document. the edges to reduce
the size of the
member.
image.
(2) Moving a single object is not possible.
When an image is Some part of the
83. Linking Embedding resized none of its image from the
parts is lost. edges is lost in
When an image is When an image cropping.
linked to a document, is embedded in a
clicking on it opens document its copy Shape of the image is Shape of the image
the original file. is added to the lost when it is resized. is not lost when it is
document. cropped.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (b) 89. (b) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (a) 93. (a) 94. (d)

Answer 95. (c) 96. (c) 97. (b) 98. (a) 99. (a) 100. (c) 101. (d) 102. (d) 103. (a) 104. (a)

Key 105. (a) 106. (c) 107. (d) 108. (b) 109. (d) 110. (b) 111. (a) 112. (b) 113. (c) 114. (c)

115. (d) 116. (d) 117. (b) 118. (c) 119. (d) 120. (b) 121. (b)

85. (b) Symbols 91. (a) Transparency

86. (a) Alignment 92. (a) Arrangement
87. (c) Crop
93. (a) Styles
88. (b) Template
94. (d) Paragraph Style
Explanation: A template is a pre-formatted
document designed to create frequently used Explanation: Paragraph styles control all
documents such as revenue letters, fax etc. aspects of a paragraph's appearance, such as
templates help in simplifying the process of text alignment, tab stops, line spacing, borders
documents creation and formatting. and can include character formatting.

89. (b) style Related Theory

 Cell style defines the appearance of a cell or a group
90. (a) Tile of cells, including aspects like fonts, colours, borders,
alignment, and number formats in a worksheet.
Related Theory  Character styles are a feature commonly found in
 In most word processors when an image is added to word processing. These allow you to apply a similar
a document it is placed centred above the current type of formatting attributes to individual characters
paragraph. However, if we want the image to cover or a specific range of text within a document. Page
the whole page, option for stretching the image is styles include margins, headers and footers, borders
also available. and backgrounds.

72 One Shot Information Technology Class X

95. (c) 10 100. (c) Anchoring

Related Theory 101. (d) Table of Content

 A table of contents (TOC) is an organised list of the 102. (d) Row
document’s headings or sections along with their Explanation: The Insert/Index Table window
corresponding page numbers.
includes the following five tabs:
Index/Table: This tab to set the table's
Caution
attributes.
 The Number of headings levels as per MS Word is 3
and 10 as per Libre & OpenOffice – Writer) Entries: This tab allows you to customize the
heading structure and design.
 Students need to carefully read the question. If
the question doesn’t mention any specific word Styles: You can modify the formatting and
processor, any of the two can be marked as answer. header styles using this tab.
Columns: If your table of contents or index
96. (c) Resize
spans multiple columns, you may find settings
Explanation: Resizing refers to the action of related to the layout and formatting through
changing the dimensions or size of various this tab.
elements within a document, such as text,
Background tab: It is used to add colour or a
images, or objects.
graphic to the table background

Related Theory 103. (a) Black

 In OpenOffice Writer, docking refers to the ability to Explanation: Each white field on the structure
attach or “dock” various toolbars, panels, or windows line represents a blank space where you can
to different sides of the application’s main window. add custom text.
This feature allows you to customize the layout of
your workspace according to your choices. You can Related Theory
dock items like the toolbar, formatting toolbar, styles
and formatting panel, navigator, and more to the
 A white field in the context of a table of contents
typically refers to the space or field where the
top, bottom, left, or right sides of the application
actual content of the table of contents is displayed.
window
The term "white field" is often used symbolically
97. (b) sharpen to describe the area where the generated table of
contents appears within the document.
Related Theory
104. (a) Wrap Text
 Smooth: It reduces the contrast between neighboring
pixels and produces a slight lack of sharpness. Explanation: In OpenOffice Writer, wrap text
 Remove Noise: Removing noise from images is a refers to the ability to control how text flows
process of reducing or eliminating unwanted and around an object, such as an image, shape, or
random variations in pixel values that can distort or another embedded element. Wrapping text
degrade the quality of an image. allows you to determine the positioning of the
 Invert: The colours of an image will be inverted or text in relation to the object such as image and
reversed so that it appears as a colour negative of creates a more visually appealing layout.
the image.
105. (a) Page Style
98. (a) Fill Format mode
Explanation: The Fill Format mode is activated Related Theory
from the sixth icon at the top of the styles
and formatting window. This method is useful
 Style is a named collection of various formatting
features that defines the looks and behaviour of
for formatting different paragraphs, words, or
various components of a document, associated with
other items with the same style, and it may be the style.
easier to use than making multiple selections
first and then applying a style to all of them. 106. (c) Frame Style
99. (a) Keep Ratio Explanation: Frame styles are used to format
graphic and text frames, including wrapping
Explanation: Keep ratio refers to the
preservation of the original proportional type, borders, backgrounds, and columns.
relationship between the width and height
of an image when making adjustments or Related Theory
resizing. Keeping the ratio ensures that the  Character Style is collection of character formatting
image does not become distorted or stretched attributes, while paragraph style includes both
unnaturally. character and paragraph formatting attributes.

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 73

107. (d) Alignment  Alignment in OpenOffice Writer refers to the
positioning of text within a paragraph or the
Explanation: Alignment refers to the vertical
alignment of objects on the page. You can align text
or horizontal placement of an image while to the left, right, center, or justify, depending on your
Arrangement controls how image are placed formatting preferences.
upon each other. Arrangement options are-
bring to front, send to back etc. 113. (c) Graphic filter toolbar, Colour toolbar
Explanation: The ‘Picture’ toolbar appears
108. (b) Anchoring
when a picture is selected which further
Explanation: In word processor, anchor symbol provides Graphic filter toolbar and colour
is used to indicate that an image is tied to the toolbar.
text at a specific point in your document which
means that if the text is moved, the image, Related Theory
which is anchored with that text will also move.
 The graphic filter toolbar is used to apply effects on
109. (d) Frame the selected image. The four type of graphic filters
in OpenOffice Writer are – Invert, Smooth, Sharpen,
Explanation: In OpenOffice Writer, "Frame Posterize.
Style" refers to a predefined set of formatting
attributes and properties that can be applied 114. (c) Headings
to frames. A frame is a container used to hold
115. (d) Formula settings
various types of content within a document,
such as images, text boxes, or other objects. Explanation: In general, templates in
OpenOffice Writer primarily focus on
Related Theory document formatting, styles, layout, and
 A typical word processor allows following types of content structure. They serve as a way to
styles: create a standardised starting point for new
 Paragraph style documents. Formulas, on the other hand, are
 Character style often associated with spreadsheet applications
 Page style like OpenOffice Calc.
 List style
 Table style 116. (d) Text wrapping
Explanation: In OpenOffice Writer, the text
110. (b) Character style
wrapping feature for graphics allows you to
Explanation: Character styles are applied to
control how text flows around or interacts
groups of characters. They are mainly used
with an inserted image or drawing. This is
when you want to change the appearance of
particularly useful when you want to position
parts of a paragraph without affecting other
an image within the text and have the text
parts. To apply a predefined character style
flow around it in a specified way.
the text is selected on which the style is to be
applied. 117. (b) Styles
111. (a) Styles and Formatting Explanation: In reference to a word processor,
"styles" refer to predefined formatting
Explanation: The Style and Formatting
attributes applied to text or elements within
window provides all the available styles to
a document. These attributes can include
choose from.
font type, font size, color, alignment, spacing,
112. (b) Anchoring and more. By using styles, users can ensure
Explanation: Anchoring is a feature that allows consistent and professional formatting
you to specify how an image or a drawing, throughout their documents by applying a
is attached or linked to the text within your specific style to headings, paragraphs, lists,
document. Anchoring determines the object's and other elements.
position relative to the surrounding text and 118. (c) Format
how it behaves as you edit the document.
Explanation: Format menu in LibreOffice Writer
offers various options to format your text e.g.,
Related Theory
applying font, alignment, bold, italic, bullets,
 Arrangement refers to the layout or positioning of
numbering, etc. features on the selected text.
objects such as text boxes, images, or shapes on a
page. You can arrange these objects in various ways, Formatting can be directly applied to the
like stacking them, aligning them, or distributing paragraphs, characters, pages, frames etc. or
them evenly. you can use “Styles” to format your text.

74 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 content, themes, etc. For example, if you want
Related Theory to create a resume you can use a resume
 The Insert menu offers commands to insert various template and modify only the sections that
elements in a document e.g., images, table, chart, require change.
etc.
The Tools menu includes tools for spell checking, 123. Style is a set of named formatting
grammar checking, word count, language settings, characteristics that you can apply on different
and document customization options such as auto- text components of a word processor such as
correction and formatting aids like rulers and page tables, paragraphs, lists etc. Usually, a word
styles.
processor has following types of styles: (1)
The Window menu provides essential tools for
Character style (2) paragraph style (3) frame
managing document views and navigating multiple
open documents. style (4) page style (5) list styles

119. (d) Hold down the Ctrl and Shift key while 124. Grouping an object means combining multiple
dragging and dropping the image objects together so that they behave as one
object. This is useful when we need to apply
Explanation: The Drag and Drop method
embeds the image file i.e., saves a copy of the same action to multiple objects.
image file in the document. This will increase 125. Steps to insert shapes are:
the size of the document. Instead of saving
(1) Click on the Insert tab on the Ribbon. Click
the image in document you can use linking
on the option Shapes in the Illustrations
to maintain smaller document sizes. Linking
group.
is done by holding Ctrl and Shift keys while
dragging and dropping the image. (2) Once you click the Shapes option a
dropdown list with pre-defined shapes
120. (b) Raster Image such as box, circle, etc. appears.
Explanation: Raster images, such as JPEGs, (3) Select the shape from the list of shapes
PNGs, and BMPs, are made up of a grid of pixels, available and draw the shape by dragging
with each pixel containing color information. the mouse with the left button clicked.
When you resize a raster image in Writer, you For example, if you like to insert a square,
are altering the physical dimensions of the select the box shaped item from the list,
image without changing the actual pixel count. click and drag the shape to draw a square.
Enlarging or compressing the image leads to
a loss of detail and sharpness which affects 126. (A) Wrap option is available in the properties
the visual quality and resolution of the image pane, when an image is clicked.
badly. Alternatively when an image is right clicked,
desired wrap option can be selected form
Related Theory the context menu.
 For more accurate resizing select the Keep Ratio
option while resizing the image from the Image (B) Two text wrapping options from following
dialog box. To open image dialog box click on Format are:
-> Image -> Properties after selecting the image. (1) In Line with text
121. (b) Two (2) Square
Explanation: A template is a pre-designed (3) Through
layout or format that serves as a starting point (4) Top and Bottom
for creating documents. In Writer, you can (5) Behind Text
create templates in two ways: (6) In Front of text
• From the document
127. Text wrapping refers to the relation of graphics
• Using a wizard
to the surrounding text, which may wrap
around the graphic on one or both sides, be
Related Theory
overprinted behind or in front of the graphic, or
 To use a specific template for your document, select
File → New → Templates and Documents. Select treat the graphic as a separate paragraph or
a desired template from the resulting Templates character.
window and click on Open.
128. The ‘Keep scale’ option does not change the
122. Templates or document templates refer to a scale of the picture while cropping it. Whereas,
sample fill-in-the-blank document that can ‘Keep image size’ option produces enlarged
help in saving time. Usually templates are image (for positive cropping values), shrinked
customized documents that may have sample image (for negative cropping values), or

Digital Documentation (Advanced) 75

 distorted image so that the image size remains (4) Graphics styles in drawings and
constant. presentations include line, area,
shadowing, transparency, font, connectors,
129. A template has following characteristics:
dimensioning, and other attributes.
(A) Templates simplify the creation of
(Or any other valid style )
documents.
(B) Templates increase efficiency by reducing 134. (A) Arrangement refers to the placement
our workload and make us feel less stressed. of graphics stacked upon each other or
relative to the text.
130. The purpose of using templates is:
(B) Text wrapping refers to the way text flows
(1) To save the time.
around or interacts with inserted images or
(2) It is a predesigned document you can
graphics within a document. Text wrapping
use to create documents quickly without
having to think about formatting. options allow you to control how the text
and graphics coexist on the page.
131. Anchoring refers to the reference point for
the graphics. This point could be the page, or 135. The table of contents is a snapshot of the
frame where the object is, paragraph, or even headings and page numbers in your document
a character. An image always has an anchor and does not automatically updates itself as
point. you make changes. It acts as a map for the
users.
132. To group drawing objects in Writer:
A good table of content has the following
(1) Select the objects by one by one clicking
characteristics:
on them while holding the Shift key. The
bounding box expands to include all the (1) It should be easy to read and simple to use.
selected objects. (2) It should be organised and formatted
properly.
(2) Take the mouse pointer over one of the
objects and choose Format ฀ Group ฀ Group (3) It must be accurate and easily accessible.
from the menu bar or right-click and (4) It should be given after the title and
choose Group ฀ Group from the pop-up copyright page.
menu.
136. Steps to resize an image in a word processor
133. (1) Paragraph styles control all aspects are as follows:
of a paragraph’s appearance, such as (1) Select the image by clicking on it. The
text alignment, tab stops, line spacing,
image will be selected with sizing handles
and borders, and can include character
around it.
formatting.
(2) Character styles affect selected text within (2) Position the pointer over any one of the
a paragraph, such as the font and size of sizing handle. The pointer shape will
text, or bold and italic formats. change to a double headed arrow.
(3) Cell styles include fonts, alignment, (3) Drag the sizing handles to increase/
borders, background, number formats (for decrease the image size.
example, currency, date, number), and cell (4) Release the mouse button when desired
protection. size is achieved.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

76 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
the sheet tabs to better reflect its content.
Objective Qs 1 mark He needs to access the Rename Sheet
1. Astitva is preparing a financial report in a dialog box to do this. How does he open the
spreadsheet and needs to present data in Rename Sheet dialog box?
an aggregate or summary form to highlight (a) Double-click on the sheet tab
overall trends and totals. He is considering (b) Right-click on the sheet tab
using a specific tool that can help him (c) Left-click on the sheet tab
consolidate multiple data ranges into a (d) Use the Format menu
summary view. Which of the following tools
5. Puneet opened a spreadsheet and did some
should he use to show data in aggregate or
work on it. All the actions that he did were
summary form? saved as a code internally. What he has
(a) Consolidate (b) Solver actually done?
(c) Scenarios (d) Goal Seek (a) Written a code in a HLL
2. The field or the column on which Subtotals is (b) Recorded a macro
to be calculated is specified in: (c) Record changes
(a) Group By box (d) Compare documents
(b) Calculate Subtotals for box 6. Ayush is working on a spreadsheet in Excel.
(c) Use Function box He is currently on the first sheet, and he
(d) Add subtotal box needs to reference the 3rd cell of the 5th
column in the 2nd sheet. Which of the
3. From the statements given below, select the following references would he use?
statements that are true. (a) C5:sheet2 (b) E3.sheet2
(I) Relative hyperlink tells the path of a (c) Sheet2.E3 (d) Sheet2.C3
document with respect to the current
location.
7. The message showing that the shared
spreadsheet is locked due to a merge-in in
(II) Absolute hyperlink tells the path of the progress is displayed:
document starting from the last folder.
(a) when there are no conflicts in the
(III) Single dot in a relative hyperlink denotes changes made by the multiple users.
the current file. (b) if one of the users is trying to save the
(IV) Double dot in a relative hyperlink document, and resolve conflicts.
denotes the parent folder. (c) when users try to make changes in same
(a) (I) and (II) cells at the same time.
(b) (I) and (IV) (d) when changes in a spreadsheet
(c) (I), (III) and (IV) document are being recorded.
Question No. 8 and 9 consist of two statements.
(d) Only (III)
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
4. Zaid is organising his workbook in a questions selecting the appropriate option
spreadsheet and want to rename one of given:

High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 77

 (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the (B) The fest was organised on different days
correct explanation of (A). for all the three wings of the school. Each
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the of the wing coordinators have added
correct explanation of (A). the expenses related details in different
workbooks. Sukhvinder needs to find out
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. the total expenses of each type for all
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. the three wings. How is this possible?
8. Assertion (A): Goal seek is also called back- (C) In the spreadsheet of the Junior wing,
solver. the coordinator later on added some of
the expenses which she had forgot to
Reason(R): Goal seek is a what-if add earlier. But she didn’t set to record
analysis tool that finds change. Now how can sukhvinder find
results from multiple out what additions were done later on?
unknown variables. (D) The fete is an annual feature of the school
9. Assertion (A): To use data from a worksheet and every time, most of the procedures
outside the worksheet its and events are same. Sukhvinder wants
qualified name must be that next time when the fete is organised
the common tasks that coordinators of
used.
each wing do on their worksheets, should
Reason(R): For a sheet named sales_qtr1 be done quickly without repeating the
the qualified name for cell in steps. How can this be done?
5th row and 6th column will
be sales_qtr1.F5 Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks

Case Based Qs 4 marks 12. Differentiate between Scenarios and Goal

seek.
10. Nandini has just joined her new job. She plans
to buy a house for which she needs to take a
13. What is a registered data source?
loan. She has so many questions related to her 14. Kritika and Manas work in same office. They
finances in her mind. Help her by answering say they are collaborating data. What do
these. they mean here by collaborating? What do
(A) Keeping in mind her monthly expenses they need to collaborate in Calc?
and her income sources which tool will
15. In a spreadsheet in which record changes is
be helpful for her to solve the ifs and
set to on, how are changes made indicated?
buts of her finances?
(B) Which what-if analysis tool she should 16. Latika opened a shared spreadsheet
use to decide how many years she would document and found that some of the cells
take to pay back the loan? have a red border. In another document
some cells have a red border with a dot.
(C) On a second thought Nandini also has
What do these two types of border indicate?
an idea that she should first save some
amount(say about n lakhs) and then buy 17. When two worksheets are merged, how is
a house. To know how much monthly selection of the data to be accepted, done?
savings she should do to reach the
target, which what-if analysis tool she 18. How can one know if a spreadsheet
must use? document is being shared or not?
(D) Nandini wants to know that how much 19. Explain the purpose of Sub and End Sub
interest will she get if she invests in a clauses.
Recurring Deposit. Which tool she should
choose? Long Qs 4 marks
11. Sukhvinder is the teacher in-charge of the 20. Explain the use of linking a worksheet to an
school’s fest organising committee. He has external data such as a table on an HTML
divided the students in different groups and page.
assigned each a different task.
(A) Three groups have been given the task 21. While reviewing changes made in a
of preparing a proposed budget and document, it is always advisable to filter the
allocate funds to different groups. changes made. Describe briefly the different
Sukhvinder wants to know as to how filters that can be used to view the changes
made.
these three suggestions are similar or
different. How can he incorporate the 22. Differentiate between Macro and Macro As
best proposals from the three groups? a Function.

78 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL
(a) Average (b) Sum
Objective Qs 1 mark (c) Max (d) Count
23. A ............... refers to a cell or a range of cells 33. In Calc, the comments are added
on a worksheet and can be used to find the (a) automatically (b) by author
values or data that you want formula to
(c) by reviewer (d) all of above
calculate.
(a) Cell range (b) Cell address 34. Group by is used in ................. tool to apply
(c) Cell reference (d) Cell name summary functions on columns.
(a) Consolidate function
24. Spreadsheet software allows the user to (b) Group and Outline
share the workbook and place it in the
(c) What-if scenario
............... location where several users can
access. (d) Subtotal
(a) Consolidated (b) Shared 35. .................. analysis tool works in reverse
(c) Network (d) Common order, finding input based on the output.
(a) Consolidate function
25. Macros are useful to ............... a task the same (b) Goal seek
way over and over again.
(c) What-if analysis
(a) repeat (b) copy
(d) Scenario
(c) paste (d) calculate
36. Macro ..................... allows us to add, delete a
26. Which of the following feature is not used module.
for data analysis in spreadsheet? (a) Standard library (b) Main
(a) Consolidating data (c) Organizer (d) Recorder
(b) Goal Seek
(c) Subtotal
37. The Recording Changes feature of
LibreOffice Calc provides different ways to
(d) Page layout record the changes made by ................. in the
spreadsheet.
27. ................. library is automatically loaded
when the document is opened. (a) one user
(a) Standard (b) My Modules (b) other user
(c) the user
(c) Libreoffice (d) All of these
(d) one or other users
28. The path of a file has ............ forward slashes.
38. Data can be viewed and compared in a single
(a) four (b) three sheet for identifying trends and relationships
(c) two (d) one using .............. function.
29. Macro as a function is capable of accepting (a) Consolidate (b) sort
.................... and returning a ................ . (c) Charts (d) Graphs
(a) name, value 39. ................. are used to enclose sheet names as
(b) value, arguments there might be a space within sheet names.
(c) arguments, value (a) double quotes (“”)
(d) none of these (b) underscore (_)
(c) dollar sign ($)
30. Which of the following feature is used to (d) Single quotes (‘ ’)
jump to a different spreadsheet from the
current spreadsheet in LibreOffice? 40. .................. scenario is used to explore and
(a) Macro (b) Hyperlink compare various alternatives depending on
(c) Connect (d) Copy changing conditions.
OR
31. Which of the following office tool is known
for data analysis? .................. is a planning tool for what-if
questions.
(a) Writer (b) Calc
(a) Goal Seek (b) solver
(c) Impress (d) Draw
(c) Subtotal (d) What-if
41. The title bar of the document shows ................
32. The default function while using Consolidate along with the file name for the shared
is ................. . mode of the spreadsheet.

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 79

 (a) track changes (b) record
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
(c) hyperlinked (d) Shared
50. How can we rename a worksheet?
42. Macro Recordings can be enabled from the
.................... option in the menu bar. 51. What are the two ways of referencing cells
(a) Sheet (b) Data in other worksheets?
(c) Tools (d) Window.
52. What is the purpose of adding comments?
43. While inserting tables from a webpage
............. selects the entire HTML document 53. How can we add comments to the changes
made?
(a) HTML (b) all
(c) HTML_all (d) select all 54. Define the term What-if analysis.
44. Which of the following is NOT an invalid 55. What do you understand by reviewing the
Macro Name? changes in the spreadsheet?
(a) formatword (b) format word
56. Give any two advantages of data analysis
(c) format*word (d) Format_word
tools.
45. Recording changes automatically ............ the
shared mode of a spreadsheet. 57. List the rules that should be kept in mind
while naming a macro.
(a) turn on (b) activates
(c) turn off (d) None of these 58. State advantages of extracting data from a
web page into spreadsheet.
46. Which of the following Libraries contains
modules with pre-recorded macros and 59. Give one point of difference between
should not be changed? (A) Subtotal and What-if
(a) My Macros (B) What-if scenario and What-if tool
(b) LibreOffice Macros
(c) Untitled1 60. What are the criteria for consolidating
(d) Test sheets?

47. A relative hyperlink stores the location with 61. Which tool is used to create an outline for
respect to the ................... location. the selected data?
(a) current (b) relative 62. Differentiate between predefined function in
(c) actual (d) none of these Calc and Macros as a function.
48. The Module can be executed from the IDE by 63. Define the terms:
pressing ................. . (A) Sharing Spreadsheet
(a) F3 (b) F4
(B) Record changes
(c) F5 (d) F6
64. How is LibreOffice Macros Library different
49. Sharing spreadsheet feature allows to save from my Macros?
the changes in
(a) multiple sheets
Long Q 4 marks
(b) user’s sheet
(c) in a same sheet 65. Differentiate between Merging and
(d) in different sheet Comparing Spreadsheet.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

(a) Scenario (b) Solver
Objective Qs 1 mark (c) Macro (d) Average
66. ............... is specifically designed to minimize [CBSE SQP 2020]
or maximize the result according to a set of 68. Rohit scored 25 out of 30 in English, 22 out
rules that you define in a spreadsheet. of 30 in Maths. He wants to calculate the
(a) Goal Seek score in IT he needs to achieve 85 percent in
(b) Scenario aggregate. Suggest him the suitable option
out of the following to do so.
(c) Solver
(a) Macro (b) Solver
(d) Subtotal [CBSE SQP 2020]
(c) Goal Seek (d) Sub Total
67. ............... is a tool to test “what-if ” questions. [CBSE SQP 2020]

80 One Shot Information Technology Class X

69. ............... can be used in a spreadsheet (c) absolute, relative
software to jump to a different location from (d) permanent, absolute
within a spreadsheet and can lead to other
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
parts of the current file, to different files or
even to websites. 77. Hema is a chartered accountant. She used to
(a) Illustrations (b) Hyperlinks maintain the accounts in a spreadsheet on
(c) Links (d) Filter everyday basis. There are number of steps
which she needs to follow every time. Can
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
you suggest her a feature of spreadsheet
70. Krish and Kritika have done a survey of through which she can perform these tasks
age wise literacy rates of their locality as quickly without repeating the steps every
a school project, which they have created time?
in a Spreadsheet. They both want to work (a) Record Changes (b) Track Changes
simultaneously to complete it on time. (c) Goal Seek (d) Using Macros
Which option they should use to access the [CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
same Spreadsheet to speed up their work.
(a) Consolidate Worksheet 78. In Calc, using the Subtotals dialog, you can
(b) Shared Worksheet select arrays and then choose a statistical
function to apply to them. For efficiency, you
(c) Link Worksheet
can choose up to ............. groups of array to
(d) Lock Worksheet which to apply a function.
[CBSE SQP 2020] (a) two (b) three
71. Which function cannot be performed (c) four (d) five
through Subtotal in a Spreadsheet? [CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
(a) Sum (b) Product
79. Solver option under Tools menu amounts
(c) Average (d) Percentage to a more elaborate form of .............. . The
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021] difference is that the Solver deals with
equations with multiple ............. .
72. Scenarios are a tool to test ................
questions. (a) Unknown variables, Goals Seek
(a) Auto (b) Goal Seek (b) Variables, Equation
(c) What-if (d) Drop Down (c) Goal Seek, Unknown variables
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021] (d) Subtotal, Goal seek
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
73. ..............., totals/adds data arranged in an
array that is, a group of cells with labels for 80. Usually, you run a formula to calculate
columns and/or rows. Which step one must a result based upon existing values. By
should follow before using the Subtotal contrast, using ............., you can discover
option? what values will produce the result that you
(a) Consolidate (b) Rename Data want.
(c) Filter Data (d) Subtotal (a) Subtotal (b) Scenario
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021] (c) Sort Lists (d) Goal Seek
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021]
74. Which of the following is more elaborate
form of Goal Seek? 81. Rama and two of her friends are doing
(a) Subtotal (b) Scenario survey of gender wise employment rates
of their locality as a school project using
(c) Solver (d) Consolidate Spreadsheet. They all want to work
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021] [CBSE 2024] simultaneously to complete it on time. What
option they should use to access the same
75. ...............
means combining data in a
Spreadsheet to speed up their work.
spreadsheet from different worksheets into
master worksheet. (a) Consolidate Worksheet
(a) Hyperlinks (b) Consolidating (b) Shared Worksheet
(c) Linking (d) Filter (c) Link Worksheet
[CBSE Term-1 SQP 2021] (d) Lock Worksheet
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
76. An ............... link will stop working only if the
target is moved while a ............... link will stop 82. In Spreadsheets,
working only if the start and target locations Statement I: To consolidate by row labels
change relative to each other. or column labels, the label
(a) absolute, fixed must be contained in the
(b) relative, absolute selected source ranges.

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 81

 Statement II: The text in the labels must (c) Data Consolidation
be identical, so that rows or (d) Data Concatenation
columns can be accurately
[CBSE SQP 2022]
matched.
Statement III: If the row or column label 89. A colored border, with ...................... , appears
does not match any that exist around a cell where changes are made in a
in the target range, it will be shared worksheet.
appended as a new row or (a) a dot in the upper left-hand corner
column.
(b) a dot in the lower left-hand corner
Consider the above three statements,
identify the correct one. (c) a cross in the upper left-hand corner
(a) Only Statements (I) and (II) are correct (d) a cross in the upper right-hand corner
(b) Only Statements (II) and (III) are correct [CBSE 2023]
(c) Only Statement (II) is correct 90. ............... feature adds data arranged in a
(d) All the Statements are correct group of cells in Calc, with labels for columns
[CBSE Term-1 2021] and/or rows.
(a) Average (b) Subtotal
83. Rohan has 50,000 that he wants to invest
in two mutual funds for one year. Fund A is (c) Goal seek (d) Solver
a low risk fund with 18% interest rate and [CBSE 2023]
Fund B is a higher risk fund with 21% interest
rate. Which feature of spreadsheets (Calc) 91. A ....................... refers to a cell or a range of
will help him to decide? cells on a worksheet whose data values can
be used in a formula.
(a) Solver (b) Subtotal
(a) Sheet (b) Cell
(c) Linking sheets (d) Macros
(c) Cell reference (d) Cell data
[CBSE Term-1 2021]
[CBSE 2023]
84. When you open a new spreadsheet, by
default, it has a sheet named ............... which 92. ......................... feature of Calc is used to test
is managed using tabs at the bottom of the 'what-if' questions.
spreadsheet. (a) Solver (b) Goal seek
(a) Sheet1 (b) Untitled1 (c) Scenario (d) Styles
(c) Worksheet1 (d) New Sheet [CBSE 2023]
[CBSE SQP 2022]
93. Macros are especially useful to ...................
85. Reviewers and authors can add their ............... the same way over and over again.
to explain their changes in the cell of (a) repeat a task (b) reject a task
Spreadsheet.
(c) report a task (d) comment a task
(a) Comments (b) Hyperlink
[CBSE 2023]
(c) Worksheet (d) Macros
[CBSE SQP 2022] 94. ............... feature of Calc helps to track what
data was changed, when the change was
86. In Calc, Arguments passed to a macro from made, who made the change and in which
Calc are always ............... . cell the change has occurred.
(a) Cell Reference (b) Value (a) Record Changes (b) Edit record
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Sheet Reference (c) Change record (d) Macro
[CBSE Term-1 2021] [CBSE 2023]
[CBSE SQP 2022]
95. .................. is specifically designed to minimize
87. In a spreadsheet using to create a hyperlink the results according to a set rules that we
to a web FTP or Telnet, click on the ............... define in a spreadsheet.
icon available in Hyperlink dialog box.
(a) Goal Seek (b) Scenario
(a) browser (b) hyperlink
(c) Solver (d) Subtotal
(c) internet (d) mail & news
[CBSE SQP 2023]
[CBSE SQP 2022]
96. ............... can help to clarify the relation
88. ............... function takes data from a series of between cells while using “Multiple
worksheets or workbooks and summaries it
Operations”.
into a single worksheet that you can update
easily. (a) Detective (b) Solver
(a) Data Combination (c) Navigation (d) Hyperlink
(b) Data Merging [CBSE SQP 2023]

82 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 97. Identify the part of a Spreadsheet using 106. In calc, shared workbooks allow:
which a user can manage multiple sheets. (a) Merging cells
(a) Status Bar (b) Sheet Tab (b) Conditional formatting
(c) Formula Bar (d) Worksheet Area
(c) Inserting pictures/graphs
[CBSE SQP 2023]
(d) Adding text [CBSE 2024]
98. Spreadsheet software can find the changes
by ................ sheets. Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
(a) changing (b) comparing
(c) renaming (d) editing
107. What is the use of Macros in a Spreadsheet?
[CBSE SQP 2023] [CBSE SQP 2020]

99. At the bottom of each worksheet, left tab 108. Mention any two operations that can be
indicates the ............... of the worksheet in a performed using Macros in a spreadsheet.
workbook. [CBSE SQP 2022]
(a) Size (b) 3 Type
109. What do you mean by Hyperlinks in
(c) Name (d) Color 1
Spreadsheets? Give the two different
[CBSE SQP 2023] types of Hyperlinks that can be used in
100. Which of the following options is not Spreadsheets.
available in hyperlink dialog box ? [CBSE SQP 2022]
(a) Internet (b) Document
110. Why do we need to merge worksheets?
(c) New document (d) Download
[CBSE 2023]
[CBSE Compartment 2021]
101. You can access a variety of ............... and 111. What do you mean by Sorting in a
other data sources and link them into Calc Spreadsheet?
worksheets. [CBSE SQP 2023]
(a) Images (b) Pictures
112. How is Goal Seek different from Solver in a
(c) Videos (d) Databases Spreadsheet? [CBSE SQP 2023]
[CBSE Compartment 2021]
113. What is the purpose of consolidating data in
102. While consolidating data, a cell range can be spreadsheets? Discuss briefly. [CBSE 2024]
named using ................... option.
(a) Name range 114. What are the two parts of a cell reference
(b) Define range while referencing data on other sheets?
(c) Consolidate name Explain with an example. [CBSE 2024]
(d) Define name [CBSE 2024]
Long Qs 4 marks
103. Kawal and his friends are working on a
Spreadsheet for entering data and updating 115. Define the following:
records. They wish to keep a track of changes.
(A) Subtotals
Which of the following options will help in
knowing who made the changes and what (B) Consolidating Data [CBSE SQP 2020]
changes were done in the spreadsheet?
116. Anshita is preparing spreadsheet notes for
(a) View changes (b) Record changes her Term Exam. Help her to write short note
(c) Store changes (d) Track changes on the following:
[CBSE 2024] (A) Scenarios (B) Goal Seek
104. Macro functions can be written to behave as (C) Solver (D) Subtotal
regular functions by writing a/an ................... . [CBSE SQP 2022]
(a) Void (b) Return
(c) Add-In (d) Dim [CBSE 2024] 117. Distinguish between the following with
respect to spreadsheets:
105. ................... option of Calc helps in viewing the (A) Relative and Absolute hyperlink.
changes made to a worksheet using original
and edited worksheet. (B) Internet hyperlink and Document
hyperlink.
(a) Edit → Revise document
[CBSE 2023]
(b) Edit → Consolidate
(c) Edit → Compare document 118. Explain the term ‘Scenarios’ in relation to
(d) Edit → Collaborate document the Spreadsheets with example.
[CBSE 2024] [CBSE SQP 2023]

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 83

119. How can an original and edited worksheet 120. Explain four types of hyperlinks that can be
be compared? applied in spreadsheets.
[CBSE Compartment 2021] [CBSE 2024]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
Reason(R): The spreadsheet software
Objective Questions facilitates the use of multiple
worksheets at a time. 1
1. To hold row and column titles in place so
that they do not scroll when you scroll a 6. Assertion (A): Kirti opened a spreadsheet
worksheet click the: document that is being
(a) Unfreeze panes command on the window shared by her team but she
menu cannot find subtotals of the
(b) Freeze panes command on the window data in that workbook.
menu Reason(R): In shared some features are
(c) Hold titles command on the edit menu not available in Calc. 1
(d) Split command on the window menu 1
Case Based Questions
2. Manisha opened the worksheet containing
Sales data of her company that contained 7. Pankaj is a data operator in a school. He found
a link. Clicking on this link opened a Writer that the earlier operator had entered the data
document. The link she clicked is called: of all 5 sections of every class in different
(a) Hyperlink workbooks each with one worksheet.
(b) Document hyperlink (A) Now Pankaj wants that there should
(c) Links to external data source be one workbook for each class with
different worksheet for each section.
(d) Absolute hyperlinks 1
What should he do?
3. Madhurima added a new worksheet in (B) How can the data of each section be
her workbook that already contained five identified in each worksheet?
worksheets. The new worksheet will be (C) How the data of each class be identified?
named: (D) How can Pankaj find the average marks
(a) Sheet.6 (b) Sheet7 of each class? 4
(c) 6sheet (d) Sheet6 1
4. Mahesh has made changes in the data of
Short Questions
a spreadsheet document but is unsure if he 8. Do you think adding document hyperlinks is
has done it right. He wants his manager to in anyway useful? How? 2
review the changes and then make these
permanent. Which option he should choose 9. What is Compare Document tool in Calc?
for this. Where it is used? 2
(a) Share document (b) Solver
10. Although the macros recorded in Calc can be
(c) Link a document (d) Record changes. 1
made to behave like Calc functions by writing
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements. code between Function and End Function but
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these still there is one difference between Macros
questions selecting the appropriate option used as function and regular Calc functions.
given: What is it? 2
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
Long Questions
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A). 11. While learning how to review a spreadsheet,
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false. Meeta came across, Accept or Reject
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. Changes dialog box. What is this dialogue
box used for? 4
5. Assertion (A): A worksheet can have
multiple workbooks. 12. What is a Macro? List its three advantages.
4

84 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b)
Key
1. (a) Consolidate letter><row number>. When a cell has to be
Explanation: Data consolidation refers to referenced from some other sheet, the sheet
summarising data from multiple sources into name needs to be specified. The syntax will be
a single sheet by applying some function like <sheet name>.<column letter><row number>
sum, average, count etc. 7. (b) If one of the users is trying to save the
document, and resolve conflicts.
Related Theory
 If the data being consolidated lies in different sheets, 8. (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
Calc consolidates it as expected. But, if the selected Explanation: Goal seek is a what-if analysis
data ranges are in the same sheet, then consolidate tool that helps to find a value according to a
will merely club the ranges one below the other. predefined result. This is why it is also called
back-solver. It works for a single value. To find
2. (b) Calculate subtotals for box
multiple unknown values solver is used.
Explanation: Group by box is used to specify
the column for whose unique values the 9. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
subtotal will be calculated. Use function box is correct explanation of (A).
used to specify the function that is to be used Explanation: To refer a cell from some other
to calculate the subtotals like sum(), average(), sheet there must be a way to specify as to
count(), max(), min() etc. the cell reference being used belongs to which
sheet. For this qualified name of the sheet is
3. (b) (I) and (IV) used.
Explanation: An absolute hyperlink tells the
path of the document from the topmost 10. (A) Using a what-if analysis tool can help
position. Single dot in a relative hyperlink Nandini navigate the various financial
denotes the current folder. scenarios based on her monthly expenses
and income sources.
4. (b) right-click on a sheet tab (B) Scenario analysis is the right choice for
Nandini to explore different repayment
5. (b) Recorded a macro
periods for her loan.
Explanation: The steps taken to perform
(C) Goal Seek is the perfect tool for Nandini to
the tasks that are to be done repetitively are determine the required monthly savings
recorded as macro. Internally these steps are to reach her savings target for buying a
saved as code that is automatically generated house.
when a macro is recorded.
(D) For calculating the interest on investments
6. (c) Sheet2.E3 such as a Recurring Deposit, using a
Explanation: To refer to a cell within the scenario analysis tool can provide Nandini
worksheet the cell reference used is <column with insights into different interest rate
scenarios and their impact on her returns.

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 85

11. (A) He should merge the three documents. and saved with the name of the macro. This
(B) To find the total expenses he needs to find code is stored between Sub and End sub clause.
the subtotal.
20. When a worksheet is linked to an external
(C) He can use Compare Document option. data source such as table on a HTML page the
(D) Sukhvinder can record a macro of the worksheet cells are automatically filled with
common tasks and then run it every time the linked data. While linking the worksheet
he needs to create similar worksheets. we can also specify the option to update the
12. worksheet on regular intervals, so that as and
Scenarios Goal Seek
when HTML table is updated, our worksheet
Scenario is a form In Goal seek form data also gets updated.
of what-if analysis of what–if analysis
wherein changes changes in values 21. The changes that are displayed can be filtered
made in the values are shown according based on the following criteria:
show the effect on to the desired (1) Date: To display changes made between a
the final outcome. outcome. certain timeline.
(2) Range: To display changes made in a
Different scenarios It is also known as certain range of cells.
can be saved with back- solving. (3) Comments: To display only those
different names. comments whose content matches the
given criteria.
13. A database that has been connected to Calc
so that its data can be used in Calc worksheet (4) Author: To display changes made by a
is known as a registered data source. it is in certain author. This is helpful in case of
*.odb format. shared document where there are multiple
reviewers.
14. By collaborating they mean that they are (5) Accepted Changes: Only those changes
working on the same document. To collaborate
that have been accepted by the reviewer
on calc they have to register their details for
are shown.
collaboration.
(6) Rejected Changes: Only those changes
15. Whenever a change is made in a document that have been rejected by the reviewer
set for record changes, Calc by default adds are shown.
a comment indicating what was changed to
what. 22.
Macro Macro as a
16. Cells with red border in a shared document Function
indicate changes made by other users.
(1) A series of steps A macro can be
Cells with red border and a dot indicate that
to be performed used as a function
some changes have been made in the cell.
repeatedly are by assigning
17. Whenever two spreadsheets are selected recorded as some value to the
for merging, the changes from the both the macro. function name with
spreadsheet are shown and the Accept or parenthesis.
Reject Changes dialogue box is also shown.
The changes that are to be retained can be (2) Macro’s codes are Function code is
accepted and others can be rejected from here stored between stored between
to get the required data. Sub and End Sub. Function and End
Function.
18. When a document is shared, the Share this
Spreadsheet with other users checkbox is (3) Macros cannot be Macros written
checked. This checkbox is available in the Share used as regular between Function
Document dialog box, which can be opened Calc functions. and End Function
from Tool command. can be used as
regular Calc
19. Whenever a macro is recorded in Calc, a code is
functions.
generated for the series of actions performed

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (a)
Answer 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (c) 41. (d) 42. (c)
Key
43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (b) 46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (c) 49. (c)

86 One Shot Information Technology Class X

23. (c) Cell reference 32. (b) Sum

Related Theory 33. (d) all of above

 A cell reference can be used to refer data from one Explanation: If a spreadsheet is set for
or more contiguous cells on the worksheet or data recording track changes, comments are
contained in different areas of a worksheet or data automatically added to the changed cell as
on other worksheets in the same workbook. what value value has been changed to what,
along with the name of the editor. Whenever
24. (c) Network the cursor is moved to the edited cell the
Explanation: When several users need to comment is displayed.
work on the same worksheet data at the
sametime it is shared and placed in a network 34. (d) Subtotal
location. Explanation: The Subtotal is used to perform
certain operations on a group of data. For this,
25. (a) Repeat the data is grouped using the Group By clause.
26. (d) Page Layout 35. (b) Goal Seek
Explanation: Data analysis is used to extract Explanation: Consolidate function combines
useful information from the data. Consolidating data from multiple worksheets into a single
data summarises data from multiple sheets. worksheet. What-if analysis shows the output
Goal seek is a what-if analysis tool and of a set of values as list and scenarios is a list
Subtotal are used to perform operation on a of values that can be used within calculations
group of data. Page layout is used to set the in spreadsheet.
margins etc., of a page and is not used for data
analysis. 36. (c) Organizer

27. (a) Standard Related Theory

Explanation: All the macros are by default  To organize macros click: Tools → Macros →
saved in the Standard library. Organize Macro → LibreOffice Basic. This will open
the LibreOffice Macro dialog box. Here click on
28. (b) three Organize to open the Macro Organizer.
Explanation: To specify reference to a cell or 37. (d) one or other users
range of cells in a different spreadsheet either Explanation: When a spreadsheet is not
we can select the cell by clicking on it or we shared recording changes is on way of keeping
can type the reference of the cell. When typing track of any changes made in the spreadsheet.
the cell reference, name of the file is given in
single quotes followed by #$ and then sheet 38. (a) consolidate
name followed by a dot and cell address in
order. However the file name is preceded by its 39. (d) Single quotes (‘ ’)
path which uses three forward slashes. 40. (d) What-If
29. (c) arguments, value Explanation: What-if scenario predicts the
output based on multiple sets of inputs. Each
Related Theory scenario can be saved with a different name
 For each recorded macro a code is generated which
and compared to make the right decision.
is internally stored within Sub and End Sub clauses. 41. (d) shared
When a macro is written within Function and End
Function block it behaves as any other Spreadsheet 42. (c) Tools
function and can take arguments and return values.
Related Theory
Caution  Macro is a single instruction that executes a set of
 Arguments are values passed to a function. instructions which can be a sequence of commands
or sequence of keystrokes.
30. (b) Hyperlink
Explanation: A document hyperlink when 43. (c) HTML_all
clicked opens the linked document. This linked Explanation: Data on a web page can be
document can be another spreadsheet, text inserted in spreadsheets in the form of tables.
document or an image. The tables in a HTML document can be inserted
using External data Dialog box. From the
31. (b) Calc available list of data ranges select the desired
Explanation: Spreadsheet software is required table. Html_all will select the entire document.
for data analysis. The Spreadsheet component
of LibreOffice is Calc. It contains tools to
44. (d) Format_word.
retrieve, correlate, explore and visualise data to Explanation: The name of a macro must begin
identify patterns, trends and relationships. with a letter, must not contain blank space,

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 87

 cannot contain any special character other 54. What-If analysis is the process of finding out
than underscore (_). how the results of a formula change when
values in the source cells are changed.
45. (c) turn off
55. Reviewing the changes means that the owner
reviews the changes made by all the users and
Related Theory
then decides which to keep and which changes
 In the Shared mode the feature of Track Changes
> Record under Edit menu is disabled. When the
to reject. Edit → track changes → Manage
spreadsheet is turned off for sharing, this feature is option is used to accept or reject the changes
turned ON. made.
56. Advantages of data analysis tools are:
46. (b) LibreOffice Macros
(i) Data analysis tools help us to predict the
Explanation: All the macros are stored in a output based on different conditions.
module. Many modules together constitute a
(ii) Data analysis helps us to plan for the
library. All the user defined macros are stored
future actions.
in Standard library, while all the pre-recorded
macros can be run from Libreoffice Macros. 57. The rules for naming a macro are:
(1) Macro name should begin with a letter
Related Theory (2) It should not have blank spaces.
 The default name of a macro is Main. (3) It cannot contain any special character
other than underscore.
47. (a) current
58. Extracting data from a web page into
Explanation: A relative hyperlink tells how to
spreadsheet helps access to the sea of
get to the document from the current position.
information. Any changes made in the HTML
48. (c) F5 page will be reflected in the spreadsheet.

59. (A) Subtotal and What-if

Related Theory
 IDE (Integrated development Environment) is a text Subtotal What-if
editor that is used to create and edit macros.
For huge amounts of What-if analysis
49. (c) in a same sheet data Subtotals are tools are used to
Explanation: Normally only one user can used for analysing analyse the effect
open a spreadsheet but when a spreadsheet data. on the outcome of
is shared multiple users can open and work on a formula when
values in some cells
the same sheet at the same time.
are changed and
50. To rename a worksheet either of the following vice versa.
two can be done:
(B) What-if scenario and What-if tool
(1) Right click on the tab of the worksheet to
be renamed and select Rename option and What-if analysis
What-if scenario
then type the new name. tool
(2) Double click on the sheet tab and type the What-if scenario What-if analysis
new name. is a set of values tool shows the
that can be used output of different
51. To reference cells in other worksheets:
in calculations in a set of values as list.
(1) Type the cell reference as <Sheetname>. spreadsheet. It si used to analyse
<cell reference> the output based
(2) Select the cell where other sheet’s cell on different sets of
reference is required, now move to the values.
other sheet by selecting the sheet tab
60. To consolidate sheets following criteria must
and select the cells or cell range and then
be satisfied:
return back to the original sheet.
(1) Data types of the data to be consolidated
52. Comments are added to a document or a must match.
spreadsheet document to review and let other (2) Labels in all the sheets for consolidating
reviewers know about the suggestions. must match.
(3) The first column must be entered as the
53. Comments can be added to the changes made
primary column on the basis of which data
by selecting the cell with the comment and
is to be consolidated.
then clicking Edit→Changes→Comments and
then edit the comment. 61. Group and Outline tool

88 One Shot Information Technology Class X

62. Pre-defined Macros as a 65. Merging Comparing Spreadsheets
Functions function Spreadsheets
Predefined functions When a macro is When two When two documents
in Calc perform some created calc in- spreadsheets are compared the Accept
operation. Internally ternally creates a are merged it or Reject Changes
Calc carries out the sequence of equiv- shows changes dialog box opens. All the
required actions for it. alent commands from bith the data that is available
stored as some pro- documents and in edited document but
gramming code. the Accept or not in original document
Reject changes is shown as Inserted.
63. (A) Sharing Spreadsheet: Sharing spreadsheet dialog box All the data that is in
means that the sheet can be accessed by opens showing original document and
multiple users at the same time and allow changes by all not in edited document
them to make changes in it . the reviewers. is shown as deleted. The
changed data is marked
(B) Record changes: Record changes allows
a s changed. Now owner
multiple users to make changes in the
can finally accept or reject
same spreadsheet. Each change is marked
the changes.
as a comment.
For two Documents can be
64. Libreoffice Macros My Macros documents to compared if they don’t
Library be merged both have the recorded
Libreoffice Macros Macros written or should have changes.
library contains created by the user therecorded
modules that have are stored in My changes in
predefined macros macros. them.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (c) 69. (b) 70. (b) 71. (d) 72. (c) 73. (a) 74. (c) 75. (b)
76. (c) 77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (c) 80. (d) 81. (b) 82. (d) 83. (a) 84. (a) 85. (a)
Answer 86. (b) 87. (c) 88. (c) 89. (a) 90. (b) 91. (c) 92. (c) 93. (a) 94. (a) 95. (c)
Key
96. (a) 97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (c) 100. (d) 101. (d) 102. (c) 103. (d) 104. (c) 105. (c)
106. (d)

66. (c) Solver 71. (d) Percentage

67. (a) Scenario Explanation: Following is the list of functions
Explanation: Scenario is a what-if analysis that can be performed in Subtotal.
tool that finds changes in the outcome based Sum, count, average, max, min, product,
on a set of values. count(numbers only), stDev(sample), stDev
68. (c) Goal Seek (population), Var(sample), VarP(Population).
Explanation: Whenever we have a set target
and need to know the values to achieve it Goal
72. (c) What-if
seek is used. 73. (a) Consolidate
69. (b) Hyperlinks Explanation: Consolidate will bring the
complete data from multiple sheets to one
Related Theory place.
 Hyperlinks are a great way of increasing data
readability and providing extra information in a 74. (c) Solver
spreadsheet. Calc uses always absolute hyperlinks.
Explanation: While Goal seek considers target
70. (b) Shared Worksheet for one single value, solver can help find values
Explanation: Whenever a worksheet is shared to obtain target in multiple cells.
it is placed in a network location and the same
copy is available for everyone to work upon. 75. (b) Consolidating

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 89

 84. (a) Sheet1
Related Theory
Explanation: All the worksheets in a workbook
 Consolidating data helps to get a better perspective are displayed as tabs in the lower left corner of
of the data. the worksheet.
76. (c) absolute, relative 85. (a) Comments
Explanation: By default, whenever a
Related Theory spreadsheet is set for record changes, changes
 An absolute hyperlink provides the path of a made are shown as comments indicating what
document from the topmost folder while a relative value has been changed to what.
hyperlink provides path of a file with respect to the
current file location. 86. (b) Value
77. (d) Using Macros Related Theory
Explanation: Macro are a series of actions  A macro is a set of recorded or written instructions
that are performed repeatedly in the same that automate tasks or perform specific actions
sequence. Once recorded as macro with a within a spreadsheet. Macros allow you to automate
name, these actions can be performed by just repetitive tasks.
playing the macro.  Arguments in Calc macros refer to the values or
variables that you pass to a macro when calling it.
78. (b) Three Arguments allow you to provide specific input to the
macro, which it can then use to perform its tasks.
Explanation: Groupby defines the column
for whose unique values the subtotal will be Caution
calculated. More subgroups can be created  Following actions cannot be recorded in a macro:
within a group to calculate subtotals efficiently. ∙ opening a window
∙ switching windows
79. (c) Goal Seek, Unknown variables
∙ actions being performed in another window
Caution ∙ selections done using mouse.
 Goal seek sets value according to a single cell while ∙ actions not related to document content.
solver sets values to get results in multiple cells.
87. (c) internet
80. (d) Goal Seek
Related Theory
Related Theory  A spreadsheet can be made to link to an external
 Scenarios are used to find the outputs based on data such as a table in an HTML page. The external
different set of values, while goal seek and solver are data then can be viewed on the sheet.
used to find the values to achieve a target.
88. (c) Data consolidation
81. (b) Shared worksheet Explanation: Data consolidation in a worksheet
Explanation: A shared worksheet, also refers to the process of combining data from
referred to as a collaborative worksheet, is a multiple worksheets into a single summary
spreadsheet that allows multiple users to work sheet. This can be useful when you have data
on it simultaneously. In this type of worksheet distributed across different sheets, workbooks,
multiple individuals need to contribute to or or files, and you want to analyse or present it
review data in real-time. in a more organised and consolidated manner.
Caution
Related Theory  The consolidated data is not linked to the source
 A consolidated worksheet refers to a sheet that data. Any change in source data is not reflected in
combines and summarizes data from multiple source the consolidated data.
sheets into a single destination while applying
functions such as sum, average, count, max etc. This 89. (a) a dot in the upper left-hand corner
consolidation process is often used to analyze and Explanation: A shared excel worksheet allows
present data from different departments, regions, or multiple users to access and edit the same
categories in an organized manner. worksheet simultaneously. There are chances
of accidently overwriting each other’s changes.
82. (d) All the statements are correct To prevent this, excel displays a colored border
Explanation: The consolidation essentially around the cell or range of cells where changes
requires that the labels in the source ranges are made by another user.
are identical or similar for proper consolidation.
If the text in the labels is not identical, you 90. (b) Subtotal
might face challenges in consolidating the Explanation: The Subtotal command in Calc
data accurately. automatically creates groups and is used
to summarise data by applying common
83. (a) Solver functions like SUM, AVERAGE, COUNT etc.

90 One Shot Information Technology Class X

91. (c) Cell reference 98. (b) comparing
Explanation: A cell reference refers to a cell Explanation: Comparing sheets in Calc involves
or a range of cells on a worksheet. It is used analyzing the differences between two or more
to specify which cell's data or contents are sheets within the same spreadsheet document.
being used in a formula, displayed in a cell, or This can be useful when working with multiple
referenced in some way. versions of a sheet or when trying to identify
changes made to a sheet over time.
92. (c) Scenario
Explanation: A scenario manager in a 99. (c) Name
worksheet is a collection of digital tools that Explanation: The leftmost tab at the bottom
allow a user to create, analyze and compare of each worksheet is typically called the "Sheet
data results in different business situations. It Tab" or simply the "Sheet Name Tab." This tab
is a way to store and manage multiple sets displays the name of the current worksheet
of input values or assumptions for a what-if and provides a way to navigate between
analysis. different sheets in the same spreadsheet
document.
Related Theory
 Goal seek in worksheet, refers to the process to find 100. (d) Download
out the input value based on an already known Explanation: The hyperlink dialog box consists
output value. of following options:
93. (a) repeat a task (1) Edit Hyperlink
Explanation: In a spreadsheet, macros are sets (2) Open Hyperlink
of pre-recorded instructions or commands that (3) Copy Hyperlink
can be created and run to perform specific (4) Remove Hyperlink
tasks or actions within the spreadsheet.
Macros are used to automate repetitive tasks. 101. (d) Databases
94. (a) Record changes Explanation: Calc allows to link files from
external sources such as HTML files, MS Excel
Explanation: If you work with a spreadsheet
files, CSV file etc.
that needs to be updated or reviewed by other
people, the option to record changes is very
useful. It keeps record of all the changes made Related Theory
by different reviewers. You can also use it when  To link external data use Insert->Link to External
you're updating a file and need to keep a track data.
of all the changes you do yourself. 102. (c) Consolidate name
95. (c) Solver Explanation: Consolidate Name option allows
Explanation: In Calc, the Solver is an you to assign a meaningful name to a cell
optimization tool that allows users to find the range. This feature makes it easier to refer to
optimal solution to a complex problem by that range during the consolidation process
adjusting the values of specific cells based on and in formulas elsewhere in your spreadsheet.
given rules.
It is particularly useful for problems involving Related Theory
maximizing or minimizing a target value  Data consolidation in Calc (LibreOffice Calc or
depending on certain restrictions or conditions. Apache OpenOffice Calc, for instance) refers to the
process of combining data from multiple sheets or
96. (a) Detective ranges within a spreadsheet into a single summary
Explanation: The "Detective" option refers to a sheet or range.
set of tools and features designed to help users
103. (d) Track changes
analyze and trace relationships between cells,
formulas, and precedents in a spreadsheet. Explanation: Track Changes feature helps
These tools are useful for understanding you keep track of modifications made to a
the dependencies and relationships within a spreadsheet, including who made the changes
complex spreadsheet, especially when dealing and when they were made. This can be
with large datasets or intricate formulas. especially useful in collaborative environments
or when reviewing and auditing spreadsheet
97. (b) Sheet tab changes.
Explanation: In Calc, the sheet tab refers to
the tabs at the bottom of the Calc window Related Theory
that represent individual sheets within a  The tracked changes can be accepted or rejected.
spreadsheet document. Each sheet tab Accepting a change applies the modification
typically has a default name (like Sheet1, to the spreadsheet permanently. Rejecting a
Sheet2, etc.) but can be renamed to reflect the change removes the modification and reverts the
content or purpose of the sheet. spreadsheet to its previous state.

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 91

104. (c) Add-In. 112. Goal seek determines what values needs to be
Explanation: Macros in Calc can be called input in a cell to achieve the described result in
and used as normal functions but they usually a formula cell. It allows varying the value for
do not behave as built-in functions. E.g., they one cell.
are not found in the functions list. Writing an Solver can solve equations that uses several
Add-in makes the function behave as regular variables, so it can be used to determine what
function. values need to be entered in multiple-input
cells to achieve the desired result.
Related Theory
 A macro is a saved sequence of commands or 113. The purpose of consolidating data in Calc is to
keystrokes that are stored for later use. It helps in combine information from multiple sources or
enhancing the productivity by automating repetitive worksheets into a single and organized dataset.
tasks or creating custom functions. This enables easier analysis, comparison,
and reporting of data. It also simplifies the
105. (c) Edit → Compare Document decision-making processes, and improves
Explanation: The Compare Document feature overall efficiency in managing and interpreting
in Calc allows you to find changes between the complex datasets.
original and the edited worksheet. It is helpful
when someone forget to recorded changes 114. When referencing data from another sheet,
using Track Changes feature. the cell reference consists of two parts: the
sheet name and the cell address within
106. (d) Adding text that sheet, separated by a dot(.). E.g., if we
Explanation: The Calc does not allows to want to reference cell B3 in sheet named
perform merging cells, conditional formatting, "SalesData" then the reference will be created
or inserting pictures. Once setup, the worksheet as ‘SalesData’.B3.
cannot be changed. However, while sharing a
worksheet, users can add text to cells. 115. (A) Subtotal adds data arranged in an array—
that is, a group of cells with labels for
Related Theory columns and/or rows. It is available in Data
Tab, using the Subtotals dialog, arrays can
 A shared worksheet allows multiple users to
collaborate on the same spreadsheet simultaneously. be selected. Choose a statistical function
The Tools -> Share Document option activates the such as Count, Min, Max etc. to be applied
collaboration feature for the open worksheet. on arrays. For efficiency, one must choose
up to three groups of arrays to which to
107. Macros help in saving time in cases when the apply a function.
same set of tasks are to be done repeatedly (B) Consolidate provides a graphical interface
like formatting or applying a similar formula in for copying data from one range of cells
a similar range of data. It can be used to name to another, then running one of a dozen
and record a set of actions. functions on the data. During consolidation,
108. Macros are used to perform different types of the contents of cells from several sheets
operations in a Spreadsheet: can be combined in one place.
(1) Formatting settings to be applied 116. (A) Scenarios: Scenarios are a tool to test
repeatedly in a spreadsheet. “what-if ” questions. Each scenario is
(2) Sorting Data named, and can be edited and formatted
(3) Applying any Mathematical functions/ separately. It is essentially a saved set
formulas. of cell values for calculations. Users can
easily switch between these sets using the
109. Hyperlinks can be used in Calc to jump to a Navigator or a drop-down list which can be
different location from within a spreadsheet shown beside the changing cells
and can lead to other parts of the current file,
(B) Goal Seek: It is used to calculate a result
to different files. It can be stored within a file as
based upon existing values. Using Goal
either relative or absolute hyperlinks.
Seek option under Tools menu, we can
110. When multiple users collaborate on the same discover what values will produce the
shared worksheets and mark their reviews result that we want.
on it, feature of merging worksheets can be (C) Solver: It is more elaborated form of Goal
used to view all of their changes at once and Seek. The difference is that the Solver deals
address them by accepting or rejecting the with equations with multiple unknown
changes. variables. It is specifically designed to
minimize or maximize the result according
111. Sorting is the process of arranging data into to a set of rules that we define.
meaningful order for the purpose of analysing
it more effectively. For example, to arrange (D) Subtotal: Totals/adds data arranged in
sales data by calendar month to produce a an array—that is, a group of cells with
graph of sales performance. labels for columns and/or rows. Using the

92 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 Subtotals dialog, user can select arrays, wanted to calculate the effect of different
and then choose a statistical function interest rates on investment, you could add a
to apply to them. For large set of data scenario for each interest rate and quickly view
Subtotal makes data analysis easy. the results.
117. (A) 119. To compare worksheets, you must have both
the worksheets – original and the edited one.
Absolute Follow the given steps to compare them:
Relative Hyperlink
Hyperlink (1) Open the edited worksheet that you want
(1) A relative hyperlink An absolute to compare with the original worksheet.
defines path of a hyperlink (2) Select Edit → Compare Document.
document with defines path of (3) An open worksheet dialog appears. Select
respect to the current the file from the the original worksheet and click Insert.
or active document. topmost folder. (4) Calc finds and marks the changes as :
(2) If the file is moved this It will stop • Inserted: The data that occurs in the
edited worksheet but not in the original
link will not break. It working if the
one.
will stop working only target is moved.
if the start and target • Deleted: The data that is in your original
worksheet but is not in the edited
locations change
worksheet.
relative to each other.
• Changes: The data that is changed.
(B)
120. The four types of hyperlinks that can be applied
Document in spreadsheets are as follows:
Internet Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks (1) Internet: These hyperlinks direct users
to a specific web address (URL) when
The hyperlink points The hyperlink points clicked. They are commonly used to link to
to a web address, to a place in either websites, online resources, or files hosted
normally starting the current on web servers. It normally starts with
with http:// or https:// worksheet or http://
is known as internet another existing (2) Mail & News: These hyperlinks open the
hyperlink. Internet worksheet default email client with a pre-filled email
hyperlinks connect document hyperlink. address when clicked. They are formatted
as "mailto:email@example. com" and are
content across the Document
useful for initiating email communications
global network of the hyperlinks are used directly from the spreadsheet.
World Wide Web. to connect content
(3) Document: These hyperlinks link to files or
within a specific documents stored on the local computer
document or on a or network drives. Clicking on the hyperlink
local network. opens the associated file using the default
application for that file type.
118. Scenarios are a tool to test “what-if ” questions.
Each scenario is named and can be edited (4) New document: This hyperlink creates a
and formatted separately. For example, if you new worksheet.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

Electronic Spreadsheet (Advanced) 93

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
6. The purpose of a database query is to:
Objective Qs 1 mark (a) extract data
1. A container of data that stores data related (b) extract data as per a condition
to a particular object or purpose is: (c) present the data in a readable format
(a) table (b) report (d) both (b) and (c)

(c) tuple (d) form 7. Select the action which cannot be done
using a form in DBMS.
2. To specify data type of a field which of the (a) Searching a record
following option is used when designing a (b) Deleting a record
table in OOBase? (c) Inserting a record
(a) Data Type (b) Field Type (d) Creating a table
(c) Type (d) Field Name
8. Prabal is using a database management
3. The users of a database work on it using software and need to locate specific records
interface provided to them. This interface from a large dataset. Which option should
he use to open the Record Search Dialog
with which users work is called: box?
(a) form (b) report (a) Find Record button
(c) front end (d) back end (b) Search
(c) Search Record
4. Ankita created a table using Table Wizard, (d) Query button
now she needs to modify data type of a field
Questions No. 9 to 12 consist of two statements
and also add one more field. She can do this
– Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
by: questions selecting the appropriate option
(a) using the Table Wizard again given:
(b) deleting the existing table and then (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
redesign the table correct explanation of (A).
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
(c) opening the table in Design view
correct explanation of (A).
(d) table structure cannot be modified. (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
5. Which of the following is NOT a field (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
property? 9. Assertion (A): Spreadsheet is not an
(I) Entry Required example of a database.
(II) Decimal Places Reason(R): A spreadsheet stores data in
one single workbook.
(III) Default Value
(IV) Format Example 10. Assertion (A): A form is an interface in user
defined layout that lets you
(a) (IV) (b) (II) view, add and change data
(c) (II) and (IV) (d) None of these directly into a table.

High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

94 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 Reason (R): Forms display data from one Eid, Deptid, Emp_Name, Dept_Name,
single table only. Designation, Grade, Basic, Manager,
HOD, Basic, HRA, DA, Phone, Address,
11. Assertion (A): In one –to - many relationship DateofBirth, JoiningDate, NoofEmp.,
a record in table A has sickleaves, paidleaves.
multiple matching records
Emp_details Department Attendance
in the table B but a record
in table B has only one (B) Identify the primary key of each table.
matching record in the table (C) Name foreign key of Emp_details table.
B. (D) What type of relation can exist between
Reason (R): In a many-to-one relation- emp_details and Department tables?
ship, the one side table is Why?
called the parent table and
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
the many side table is called
the child table. 15. Many application programs are written to
handle data and store them in appropriate
12. Assertion (A): A group-field is always a non
files. What are the limitations of this system
–primary key field.
of storing and retrieving data?
Reason (R): A group field has same value
for multiple fields. 16. Differentiate between Alternate key and
Candidate key.
Case Based Qs 4 marks 17. Although both forms and reports can be
used to view data but still both are different.
13. Consider the structure of the tables of the
How?
students database given below:
Table-Student-details 18. A table named School is created where each
Adm Father Mother Phone Depart- record consists of several fields including
Name Address
No Name Name No ment AdmissionNo, RollNo, Name. Which of these
Table-ClassXIIA can be set as primary field and why?
Roll Adm Basic
No No
Name English Maths
Salary
Hindi 19. Name the views in which fields can be
Table-Teacher deleted.

Tid TName Class Subject

Guardian 20. Name the data type used to store the
Name
following data:
(A) Identify the field in each table which
(A) Today’s data
should not be present in it.
(B) Present time
(B) Identify the data types for each of the
(C) Date and time of birth together
fields of the table Teacher.
(C) If a relationship is established between 21. What is description column in Table Design
the student_details table and table Class View?
XIIA. What kind of a relationship it would 22. Define the following:
be.
(A) Group-field
(D) Write an SQL query to display the
(B) Grouping Function
records of all the teachers teaching class
XIIA. Long Qs 4 marks
14. Radhika is a programmer who has been 23. What do you understand by Data Validation?
assigned the task of storing and managing How is it achieved in OO Base?
data of employees of an organisation.
24. What are the conditions for referential
(A) From the pool of the field names given
integrity?
below, select the appropriate field and
write it under the correct table name 25. How does the DBMS ensures referential
column. Integrity?

Database Management System 95

 NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL
(a) Data Values (b) Records
Objective Qs 1 mark
(c) Fields (d) Tables
26. A ............... is a database management system
37. A ............... helps the user to systematically
that is based on the relational model.
store information in the database.
(a) RDBMS (b) DBMS
(a) table (b) form
(c) SQL (d) Flat file
(c) report (d) query
27. Which of these is a popular DBMS software?
38. By default, data is arranged in ............... order
(a) Oracle
using ORDER BY clause.
(b) IBM Db2
(a) ascending (b) descending
(c) Microsoft SQL Server
(c) random (d) none of these
(d) All of these
39. ............... statement is used for modifying
28. A ............... is a unique value that identifies a records in a database.
row in a table.
(a) MODIFY (b) UPDATE
(a) Tuple (b) Degree
(c) CHANGE (d) COMMIT
(c) Primary key (d) Candidate key
40. ............... statement is used to remove one or
29. Composite Key is a combination of ............... more records in a Database.
columns.
(a) ROLLBACK (b) COMMIT
(a) Two (b) Multiple
(c) DELETE (d) MODIFY
(c) Primary key (d) Foreign key
41. A ............... helps to collect specific information
30. A ............... is a set of data values of a
from the pool of data in the database.
particular type, one for each row of the
table. (a) form (b) query
(a) record (b) field (c) table (d) report
(c) primary key (d) data item 42. ............... is used to display the summary of
31. A ............... represents a single, data item in data.
a table. (a) Report (b) Query
(a) record (b) field (c) Table (d) Form
(c) primary key (d) data item 43. ............... are the interfaces with which the
32. ............... are used to identify which type of user interacts.
data we are going to store in the database. (a) Report (b) Query
(a) Record (b) Field (c) Table (d) Form
(c) Primary key (d) Data type
44. Which of the following cannot be considered
33. The types of languages used for creating as an example of a database?
and manipulating the data in the Database (a) Dictionary
are ............... & ............... . (b) Telephone directory
(a) TCL, DDL (b) TCL, DML (c) Marks Register
(c) DDL, DML (d) None of these (d) Newspaper
34. A ............... is a part of DML involving 45. Which of the following data models sets a
information retrieval only. relation between two or more tables?
(a) Update (b) SELECT (a) Relational Data Model
(c) CREATE (d) DATABASE (b) Network Data Model
35. A popular data manipulation language is (c) Hierarchical Data Model
............... . (d) Connection Data Model
(a) DBMS (b) RDBMS
46. Which of the following is required to set a
(c) MYSQL (d) SQL relationship between the two tables?
36. ............... are the basic building blocks of a (a) Both the tables must be in different
database. databases

96 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (b) Both the tables must have a common
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
field
(c) Both the tables must have the same 54. How is data organised in a RDBMS?
name
55. Define the structure of a table.
(d) Both tables must be stored in documents
folder only. 56. Differentiate between Tuples and Attributes.
47. Which type of relationship exists between 57. What is the file extension for databases
a student and the subjects studied by him/ created using OpenOffice Base?
her?
58. List any three file formats that can be
(a) One-to-one
managed using OpenOffice.org Base?
(b) One-to-many
(c) Many-to-many 59. Name DML commands.
(d) All of the above 60. What is the purpose of using queries?
48. In the relationship design screen, the 61. Which clause of Select statement helps to
relationship between the two tables is done
display specific data?
using ................. operation.
(a) Click (b) Double Click 62. Differentiate between WHERE and ORDER
(c) Drag and Drop (d) Right click BY clause of SQL statements.

49. The conditions to filter the records are set in 63. State the purpose of Update Command with
the .................. row. the help of an example.
(a) Function (b) Group 64. Why there is a need to create forms?
(c) Criterion (d) None of these
65. What is the purpose of creating reports?
50. When a table is selected in a Query wizard,
the corresponding fields are displayed in the 66. What are the pre-requisites to create a form
.................. list box. and reports?
(a) Query Details Area 67. Give one point of difference between Data
(b) Available Fields and Information.
(c) Fields in the Query
68. Give any two advantages of relating a table
(d) Condition
in a database.
51. Which of the following is NOT true about
69. What is the use of Alias row in the Design
forms?
grid of the Query Design window?
(a) It is the front end for data entry
(b) It can contain only text fields 70. What is the difference between a static and
(c) Graphics can be inserted on the form a dynamicreport?
(d) It can contain only fixed number of
records
Long Qs 4 marks

52. Which of the following properties in the 71. State the relationship and difference
Properties: Label Field text box is used to between a primary and foreign key?
insert a tool-tip on the form?
72. What data types are used in DBMS /RDBMS?
(a) Tool Text (b) Help Text
(c) Tool Tip (d) Help Tip 73. How many types of relationships can be
created in Base? Explain each of them.
53. A .................. type of report changes
automatically as the field values in the base 74. What do you mean by sorting? In how many
table or query change. ways it can be done?
(a) Static (b) Dynamic 75. Explain referential integrity with the help of
(c) formal (d) Informal an example.

Database Management System 97

 PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS
(a) relational
Objective Qs 1 mark (b) flat File
76. ............... statement is used to retrieve records (c) either Relational or Flat file
in a database. (d) hierarchical
(a) Alter (b) Update [CBSE Term - 1 SQP 2021]
(c) Select (d) Create 85. Which one of the following is an example of
[CBSE SQP 2020] RDBMS?
77. A ............... represents a single, data item in (a) Mongo DB (b) Windows registry
a table. (c) Publisher (d) Oracle
(a) row (b) column [CBSE Term - 1 SQP 2021]
(c) data type (d) primary Key 86. The ........... has evolved since the 1960s to ease
[CBSE SQP 2020] increasing difficulties in designing, building
and maintaining complex information
78. ............... database is a type of database that systems.
stores data in several tables. (a) Knowledge concept
(a) Flat (b) Relational (b) Formula concept
(c) both (a) and (b) (c) None of them (c) Database concept
79. Rudraksh wants that the name column of (d) Forms concept
a table must not be left blank. Help him to [CBSE Term - 1 2021]
identify the field property for this purpose.
87. Malini wants to store a huge amount of
(a) Length (b) Default information about her zone in a database.
(c) Entry Required (d) Format She wants that data should not be repeated
[CBSE SQP 2020] in her file. Her friend Gargi explained her
various benefits of storing data in RDBMS.
80. ............... can be set for a field if the user It helps in preventing/controlling duplication
doesn't provide any value while entering the of data. Which of the following terms is used
values in the table. to refer to duplication data?
(a) Required (b) Default (a) Data sharing (b) Data privacy
(c) Primary key (d) Format (c) Data redundancy (d) Data integrity
[CBSE SQP 2020] [CBSE Term - 1 2021]
81. ................... data type takes the values in the 88. When primary key constraint is applied on
form of 0 and 1 in the database. one or more columns then it is known as
(a) Integer (b) Text ............................ .
(c) Boolean (d) Memo (a) foreign key
[CBSE SQP 2020] (b) alternate key
82. Database servers are referred to as ............... . (c) candidate key
(a) front-ends (b) back-ends (d) composite Primary key
(c) clients (d) model [Mod. CBSE Term - 2 2022]
[CBSE Term - 1 SQP 2021] 89. A row that represents a single data item in a
table is known as .................. .
83. A table is a set of data elements that is
organised using a model of vertical ............... (a) Record (b) Attribute
and horizontal ............... . (c) Tuple (d) Record or tuple
(a) rows, tables (b) columns, rows [Mod. CBSE Term - 2 2022]
(c) rows, columns (d) forms, reports 90. Identify the property which helps to set the
[CBSE Term - 1 SQP 2021] number of characters in text/varchar type
field of a table in DBMS.
84. Akshat wants to store a huge amount of
information about his firm in a database. (a) Entry Required (b) Default Value
Which type of table organisation would be (c) Size (d) Length
most suitable for this purpose? [CBSE SQP 2022]

98 One Shot Information Technology Class X

91. ..................... means that the query uses (a) Numeric (b) Varchar
criteria you provide to hide some data and (c) Binary (d) Boolean
display only required data.
[CBSE SQP 2023]
(a) Filtering (b) Sorting
(c) Report (d) Forms 100. Geet has written a SQL query in SQL view.
But he doesn’t know how to execute the
[CBSE SQP 2022]
query using keyboard keys. Suggest him the
92. Which of the following application is not shortcut key to complete the task.
appropriate to store data about ABC Bank (a) Enter (b) Ctrl + E
customers? (c) Space bar (d) F5
(a) OpenOffice Base [CBSE SQP 2023]
(b) MS Access
(c) OpenOffice Writer 101. A table can have only .............................
primary key in a database.
(d) MS Excel [CBSE SQP 2022]
(a) 1 (b) 2
93. The length of the field value of text data type (c) 3 (d) Many
is .............. characters by default in DBMS.
[CBSE SQP 2023]
(a) 10 (b) 25
(c) 20 (d) 50 102. Which one of the following is not an example
of DBMS ?
[CBSE SQP 2022]
(a) PostgreSQL (b) SQLite
94. ................... store data in a single table which (c) FoxPro (d) Impress
is suitable to store less amount of Data.
[CBSE 2023]
(a) Flat file (b) Relational
(c) Mini file (d) Single file 103. Binary data types in a database can be used
[CBSE SQP 2022] for storing ..................... .
(a) photos, music files, etc.
95. Identify the mode, where we can modify in (b) integer values
the structure of table?
(c) only image files
(a) Datasheet view (b) Structure view
(d) only video files
(c) Design view (d) All of the above
[CBSE 2023]
96. A ........................ is an interface in a user
specified layout that lets users to view, 104. ................... clause can be used with the
enter, and change data directly in database SELECT statement in SQL to specify which
objects such as tables. rows to retrieve from the table.
(a) Report (b) Query (a) WHERE (b) GROUP
(c) Form (d) Database (c) SAME (d) SIMILAR
[CBSE 2023] [CBSE 2023]

97. There are ........................ types of relationships 105. Which one of the following options is
in a table of a database. different from the other options?
(a) 1 (b) 3 (a) Columns (b) Attributes
(c) 4 (d) Many (c) Tuples (d) Fields
[CBSE SQP 2023] [CBSE Compartment 2021]

98. A Relational database uses ............................. 106. In this relationship, both the tables must
commands which is a standard user have primary key columns.
application that provides an easy (a) One-to-many (b) One-to-one
programming interface for database (c) Many-to-many (d) None of the above
interaction.
[CBSE Compartment 2021]
(a) Access (b) Python
(c) SQL (d) Protocol 107. .................... data types are used for describing
numeric values for the field used in the table
[CBSE SQP 2023]
of a database.
99. Suraj wants to create a database for his (a) Number (b) Real
clients. For this purpose, he needs to store (c) Integer (d) Numeric
the email IDs of his clients. Which data type
[Mod. CBSE Compartment 2021]
should he use to accomplish this purpose?

Database Management System 99

108. A ............................... is a set of data values of a Case Based 4 marks
particular simple type, one for each row of
the table. 116. Write the SQL commands to answer the
(a) tuple (b) data type queries based on Fabric table
(c) primary key (d) attribute
ID Fname Type Disc
[Mod. CBSE Compartment 2021]
F001 Shirt Woollen 10
109. Which of the following is/are the advantage F002 Suit Cotton 20
of database?
F003 Tunic Cotton 10
(a) Recovery (b) Backup
(c) Data security (d) All of the above F004 Jeans Denim 5
[CBSE Compartment 2021] F006 Shorts Cotton 7

110. .................... statement is used to add one or (A) To insert the following record
more records to a database. (“F005”, “Kurta”, “Woollen”, 5).
(a) UPDATE (b) ALTER (B) To display only those fabric whose disc is
(c) MODIFY (d) INSERT INTO more than 10.
[Mod. CBSE 2020] (C) To display those record whose type is
‘Woollen'.
111. ........................ statement retrieves zero or
(D) To modify the fabric shirt by increasing
more rows from one or more database
discount by 10.
tables.
(E) To delete the record of fabric F003 from
(a) SELECT (b) DATABASE
table. [CBSE SQP 2018]
(c) UPDATE (d) QUERY
[CBSE 2020] 117. (A) The structure of a table “ITEM” is given
below. Suggest suitable data type and
112. In OpenOffice Base, the relationship applied size of each column.
on the tables can be removed with the help
Column
of ................... option.
Itemno
(a) Clear (b) Remove
Iname
(c) Drop (d) Delete
Price
[CBSE 2024]
Quantity
113. In SQL, the keyword to display records in (B) Consider the following table “ITEM”:
ascending order is
Table: Item
(a) Asce (b) Incr
(c) Asc (d) High Itemno Iname Price Quantity
[CBSE 2024] 11 Soap 40 80

114. Roshni has created a table Customer in 22 Powder 80 30

SQL and wants to store photograph image 33 Face 250 25
of every customer under Cust_photo field. cream
Suggest a suitable data type from the
44 Shampoo 120 100
options given below .
55 Soap box 20 50
(a) IMAGE
(b) PICTURE Write queries to:

(c) LONG VARBINARY (i) Display the total amount of

each item. The amount must be
(d) GRAPHIC [CBSE 2024]
calculated as the price multiplied by
115. By default, all the fields in OpenOffice Base quantity for each item.
will have ................... datatype. (ii) Display the details of items whose
(a) int (tiny) (b) Boolean price is less than 50.
(c) text (varchar) (d) text (char) [CBSE SQP 2020]

100 One Shot Information Technology Class X

118. Write SQL commands:
Number Name Age Subject DateofJoin Salary Gender
1. JUGAL 34 COMPUTER 10/01/2019 12000 M
2. PRATIGYA 31 SCIENCE 24/03/2019 20000 F
3. SANDEEP 32 MATHS 12/12/2019 30000 M
4. SANGEETA 35 SCIENCE 01/07/2020 40000 F
5. SATTI 42 MATHS 05/09/2020 25000 M
6. SHYAM 50 SCIENCE 27/06/2021 30000 M
7. SHIV OM 44 COMPUTER 25/02/2021 21000 M
8. SHALAKHA 33 MATHS 31/07/2020 20000 F

(A) To show all the information about IT (C) To display the subject of all the teachers
teachers. whose age is more than 40 years.
(B) To list the details of all the teachers who (D) To display the list of names of all the
are getting salary between 20000 to teachers in alphabetical order.
35000. [CBSE Term - 2 2022]
119. Consider the following table:
STUDENT

ADMNO NAME GRADE DOB MARKS HOUSE GENDER

1001 RUPAL 9 10/04/2006 76 GREEN M
1002 RASHMI 9 08/12/2005 87 RED F
1003 ARNAV 10 25/05/2004 81 GREEN M
1004 SUMONA 9 23/08/2005 68 RED F
1005 ARUN 9 16/07/2005 72 GREEN M
1006 TIA 9 22/09/2005 91 BLUE F
1007 ROSHAN 10 26/08/2004 89 BLUE M
Write SQL Commands: (B) Write SQL commands for the following:
(A) To display the details of all students of (i) Display Sales ID and price of all
Green House. products whose discount is more
(B) To increase the marks by 5 whose than 1000.
ADMNO is 1005.
(ii) Display the details alphabetically by
(C) To display the details of all students
whose MARKS are less than 80. product name.
(D) Display the list of all students in (iii) Display product name and sales
descending order of MARKS. price after deducting the discount
[CBSE Term - 1 2021] from the price.
Note: Sales price can be calculated as
120. Consider the following table: (price-discount) [CBSE SQP 2022]
Sales
121. Your friend owns a chemist shop, he needs
Sale-ID Prod- Price Discount to keep records of the medicines with their
Name id’s, date of purchase, expiry date, price,
etc. in a database program. But he does not
1101 Laptop 65000 2500
have any knowledge about the database.
1103 Pen tab 29500 1000 Explain to him the following to get a better
understanding of the DBMS concepts.
1105 Desktop 50000 1550
(A) What is DBMS? Explain in brief.
1106 Printer 12000 2000 (B) Name any two database programs
(A) How many fields and records are there which can be used to create a table and
in Sales table? store the data as per the requirement.

Database Management System 101

 (C) Which field can be set as a Primary Key? S003 Social Sci. 18-03- 2021 Monday
(D) Is it possible to make more than one field
as a primary key in your table? (Yes/No). S004 Science 21-03- 2021 Thurs¬day
Justify your answer. (A) Write a SQL command to display the
[CBSE SQP 2022] records in ascending order by date of
exam.
122. Consider the following Datesheet table and
write the queries for the following: (B) Write a query to display the above date
sheet.
Sub_ Sub_ Date of Days (C) Write a query to display the subject
code Name Exam name and date of the exam held on
‘Monday’
E001 English 11-03- 2021 Monday
(D) Write a SQL command to display the
date of exam and Sub_Name of Science
H002 Hindi 15-03- 2021 Friday
subject. [CBSE SQP 2022]

123. Consider the table Product and write SQL queries for the following:
Table : Product

Pid Pname Price Quantity Category

P01 Board 10000 2 Office
P02 Eyeliner 700 50 Makeup
P04 Pencil 5 500 School
P05 Lamp 250 10 Domestic
P08 Bedsheet 450 45 Domestic
P09 Laptop 75000 15 Office
(A) To display names of all product whose (C) Write a query to modify the location of
category is “domestic”. V003 from Kolkata to Gujarat.
(B) To display product name and price [CBSE SQP 2020]
whose quantity is less than 50.
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
(C) To display price and quantity of Laptop.
(D) To display name and quantity of those 125. Differentiate between flat file and relational
database. [CBSE SQP 2019]
products whose price is above 5000.
[CBSE 2024] 126. Write a Query to create a Table with the
following structure
124. Consider the following Vendor table and Table Product
write the queries
Field Datatype
Table Vendor
PID Char(4)
Vendor VName Date of Location
ID Registration Pname Varchar(20)

V001 Mother 20-01-2009 Delhi Description Varchar(40)

dairy Price Decimal
V002 Havmor 01-04-2015 Gujarat [CBSE SQP 2020]
V003 Amul 12-05-2012 Kolkata 127. Mention any two integer data types of a
V004 Kwality 15-10-2013 Mumbai table field in database.
Walls [CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]
(A) Write a Query to display all records 128. Name the relationship in which one column
(B) Write a Query to add a new row with the of the primary key table is associated with
all the columns of the associated table and
following details
vice versa.
(“V005”, “Vadilal”, “2010-03-20”, “Pune”) [CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]

102 One Shot Information Technology Class X

129. Define Reports of a database. PID PNAME RUNS GENDER DOB
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]
P101 SACHIN 13000 M 10/04/2001
130. How Entry Required and Default Value P102 KAPIL 700 M 12/02/1998
properties of a table field in a database are
P103 SAURABH 12000 M 13/04/2001
different from each other?
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022] P104 VIRAT 12500 M 17/03/2005

136. List Numeric and Alphanumeric Data types

131. What is referential integrity? Explain its in OpenOffice Base.
two(any) purposes.
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]
137. Write short note on Data Consistency.
132. Identify the columns and data types of a [Mod. CBSE Compartment 2021]
table: Airlines. Mention at least four columns
138. Explain two types of languages used for
with data type. creating and manipulating the data in
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022] databases. [CBSE 2020]

133. Explain any two types of relationship that 139. Structure of a table "Orders" is given below.
Suggest suitable data type of each column
can be created in tables.
Table: Orders
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022]
Order_ID Order_date Customer_ID Amount
134. Explain the term Sorting.
[CBSE Term - 2 SQP 2022] A_101 12/12/19 C3445 1200.00
A_202 11/09/19 C1245 3456.00
135. Identify any two Column name/Attribute
and their data types from a given table: A_402 09/07/19 C2121 2312.00
PLAYER 2 [CBSE 2023]
140. Consider the following table "Books".
BkID BkName Author Qty Price

B_101 Learning with Fun Jacobins 5 355.00

B_103 How I Live Now Meg Rosoff 4 400.00

B_104 I Capture the Castle Dodie Smith 5 520.00

B_106 Mortal Engines Philip Reeve 4 260.00

B_110 The Kite Rider Geraldine 3 270.00

McCaughrean

Write SQL queries to: DESIGN Varchar(20)

(A) Display data of all books whose quantity
SALARY Decimal
is more than 3.
(B) What is a primary key?
(B) Display total amount of all books whose
(C) Categorize the following commands as
price is less than 500.
DDL and DML:
(Hint: amount = Qty x Price) [CBSE 2023] SELECT, ALTER, INSERT, DROP
[CBSE 2019]
Long Qs 4 marks
142. Write down the steps for creating a table in
141. (A) Create table EMPLOYEE OpenOffice application.
EMPID Char(4) [CBSE 2019]

EMPNAME Varchar(15) 143. What is database server? Explain Primary

key and Foreign key. [CBSE 2019]

Database Management System 103

 PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
applications as well as
Objective Questions any other applications
1. Duplication of data is data redundancy, but that are developed in
multiple copies of same data that do not future. 1
match is called: 6. Assertion (A): Entry Required field
(a) Data consistency property ensures that no
(b) Data inconsistency NULL value is entered in
(c) Data integrity that field.
(d) Data validation 1 Reason (R): NULL value represents a
legal empty value. 1
2. Which of the following statements is False
(I) A table can have multiple primary keys. Case Based Questions
(II) All the candidate keys are primary keys
7. Consider the table given below:
(III) A primary key is also a candidate key.
Table Items:
(IV) An alternate key can have repetitive
values Item Item Supplier Quantity Price
(a) (I), (II), (IV) (b) (III), (IV) Code Name
(c) (I), (II) (d) All are false 1 (A) Suggest the data types for each field.
3. Manika has a very good collection of books. (B) Select the primary key field.
She wants to set up a table to keep record (C) Write query to find the total quantity
of all the books she has. In that table each supplied by each supplier.
book will be a: (D) Which field property should be applied
(a) record (b) long integer to the fields of the table to enforce data
(c) column (d) data type 1 validation. (suggest for any two fields) 4

4. As a data analyst tasked with preparing a Short Questions

comprehensive report, you need to utilize
various functions in Excel to analyze sales 8. How is data organised and stored in OO
data. Among the options below, which Base? 2
function is not typically categorized as a
9. Describe the following components of the
summary function?
OO window.
(a) Count (b) Sum (A) Database window
(c) Average (d) Median 1 (B) Object Buttons
Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements. (C) Status Bar 2
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
questions selecting the appropriate option given: 10. What is a sort-field? In what order will the
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the ‘Name’, field be sorted if sort Ascending is
correct explanation of (A). selected for it? 2
(b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
correct explanation of (A).
Long Questions
(c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(d) (A) is false but (R) is true. 11. Write any four steps in designing database.
4
5. Assertion (A): A database enforces data
sharing. 12. Explain the purpose of following options in
Reason (R): DBMS makes sure that the Query Design window.
data in a database can (A) Field (B) Sort
be shared by existing (C) Function (D) Criterion 4

104 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c)
Key 11. (b) 12. (a)

1. (a) table 6. (d) both (b) and (c)

Explanation: A table is created to store Explanation: Queries are a useful way to
extract meaningful information from the
each type of information that is available or
available data.
collected.
7. (d) creating a table
2. (b) Field Type Explanation: A form takes input from the user
and adds it directly into an existing database
Related Theory table. It can also search, modify or delete a
 After selecting the fields, we need to specify the data record. Since it works on an existing table so
types and formats of these fields. For this field type forms can’t be used to create a table.
option is specified in table design window or table
wizard. Related Theory
 Searching, deleting and inserting all use DML
3. (c) front end commands. Creating a table is done through DDL
commands.
Related Theory 8. (b) search
 Although users interact with design view, table Explanation: In database management
wizard etc., to use the database, the actual software, typically clicking on the "search"
processing is performed by the database Server. This option opens the Record Search Dialog Box,
is called the back end. allowing users to input search criteria and
locate specific records within the database.
4. (c) opening the table in design view The other options provided do not commonly
Explanation: A table once designed can be refer to the action of initiating a search within
modified by opening it in the Table Wizard such software.
irrespective of whether it was created using 9. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
Table Wizard or in Table Design View. Explanation: A database system that stores
all the data in one single file is called a flat
5. (d) None of these database. Spreadsheet is an example of flat
Explanation: Entry required property database.
mandates data entry into a field. Decimal
10. (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
Places property is used to specify number
Explanation: Forms display one record at
of decimal places when field type is set to a time but can display fields from multiple
number. Default value provides a value to the related tables.
field when no value is available from the user’s
side. Format Example property is used to set Related Theory
how the data will be displayed.  Field properties help to enforce data validation.

Database Management System 105

 Caution 16. Alternate Key Candidate Key
 To display multiple records either queries or reports
are used.
(1) In a table there All the fields or
may be more combination of
11. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the than one fields fields that could
correct explanation of (A). that have a possibly be primary
unique value, key are called
12. (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the but only one of candidate key.
correct explanation of (A). them is selected
Explanation: Since a primary key field has as a Primary key,
unique value for each record it can’t be chosen the other field is
to group records. called alternate
key.
13. (A) Student_details → Department
ClassXIIA → Basic Salary (2) Primary key Primary key of
Teacher → GuardianName can not be an the table is also a
Alternate key candidate key.
(B) Tid → char (3)
TName → Varchar(20) 17.
Class → char(4) Reports Form
Subject → varchar(15) (1) Reports can be Forms display only
(C) A one-to-one used to view one record at a time.
(D) SELECT * FROM Teacher WHERE class = multiple records
‘XIIA’; at a time.

14. (A) (2) Reports present Forms display data

data in a printed on screen.
Emp_details Department Attendance format.

Eid Deptid Eid (3) Reports can’t be Forms can be used

used to update to update data in
Deptid Dept_Name Sickleaves data. tables.
Emp_Name Manager Paidleaves
18. Admission No must be used as primary key
Designation NoofEmp because the number is unique for every student
of the school. Roll number are same across all
HOD classes and sections. There can be more than
Phone one student with same name. So both these
fields can’t be used as primary key.
Basic
19. To delete a field open the table in design view.
Address
DateofBirth
20. (A) DATE
(B) TIME
JoiningDate
(C) TIMESTAMP
(B) Emp_details → Eid
21. It is used to add the description for the field for
Department → Deptid
future reference.
Attendance → Eid
(C) Deptid 22. (A) Group field: A field that has same value
(D) Many-to–one. There are many employees for multiple records is called a group
belonging to same department. But field.
for each employee there is only one (B) Grouping Function: The functions that
department. calculate aggregate or a single value for a
set of values are called grouping functions
15. The file system has following disadvantages: or aggregate functions.
• Data redundancy
• Data inconsistency 23. Data validation ensures that the data entered
in the database is as per the norms of the
• Incorrectness of data
organisation. Any data that is not in accordance
• Data insecurity with the standards must be discarded.
• Unsharable data In OO Base to enforce data validation, field
• Non-standardised data properties are set. These field properties are:

106 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (1) Entry Required: To mandate a value entry (2) Data types of the related fields must be
in a field. same.
(2) Length: To restrict the data to a maximum (3) The related tables must be of the same
length. database.
(3) Decimal places: To restrict the maximum
number of decimal places entered in a 25. When referential integrity is enforced in a
number field. database:
(4) Default Value: Specifies a default value to (1) A value that doesn’t exist in the primary
be given to a field if no value is entered. key of the primary table, can’t be entered
(5) Format Example: It controls the look of into the foreign key field of a related table.
the data entered in a field. (2) A record in primary table can’t be deleted
if a matching record exists in the related
24. To set referential integrity following conditions
must be met: table.
(1) The matching field of the primary table (3) A primary key value can’t be changed in
must be a primary key in the referred table the primary table, if there exists a matching
or must have a unique index. record in the related table.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (d)
Answer 36. (d) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (c) 41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (d) 45. (a)
Key
46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (b)

26. (a) RDBMS

Related Theory
Explanation: In Relational Data Models data
is stored in multiple tables and the tables are  A row in a table is called tuple. It represents a single
data item in a table.
linked using a common field.
 Number of rows in a table is its cardinality. The field
or two or more fields of a table that can be a primary
Related Theory
key are called Candidate keys.
 In Flat File database systems data is stored in a
single table. 29. (b) Multiple
 Flat File systems are suitable for less amount of data
whereas for large amount of data relational system Related Theory
is used.  Data in a relational data model is integrated using
Keys. These keys can be Primary key, composite
27. (d) All of these key or foreign key. Primary key is used to identify
a record uniquely. When more than columns are
Related Theory together used as Primary key it is called a composite
 DBMS software allow users to store, organise, key.
retrieve, and manipulate data in databases. Some
popular examples of DBMS software include: 30. (b) field
l Oracle Database Explanation: A field of a table consists of
l MySQL values of same type.
l Microsoft SQL Server 31. (a) record
l PostgreSQL
Explanation: A single data item consists of
l IBM Db2 different values for each field. This data item is
l MongoDB called a record or tuple.
l SQLite
l Apache Cassandra 32. (d) Data type
l Microsoft Access
Related Theory
l MariaDB
 Fields contain data of particular type. Data types
28. (c) Primary key can be of following types:
l Numeric Types
Explanation: In RDBMS data is integrated using
keys. To identify a record uniquely primary key l Alphanumeric Types

is used. l Binary Types

Database Management System 107

 l Date time commands like INSERT INTO or UPDATE or ALTER.
l Boolean type But to write this updated data to disk so that the
changes become permanent COMMIT command is
33. (c) DDL, DML required.
Explanation: DDL is a set of commands that
40. (c) DELETE
defines the structure of a table.
DML is a language that allows users to access Related Theory
and manipulate data in a database.
 ROLLBACK is used to undo the changes made to a
34. (b) SELECT table before the COMMIT command is used.

Explanation: SELECT command is used to 41. (b) query

search records based on different criterion
Explanation: Query collects specific
from a table.
information from the pool of data and report is
35. (d) SQL used to display this data in a specified format.
Explanation: SQL or Structured Query Form is used to collect data from the user and
Language is used to manipulate data in various store or modify in the table.
RDBMS.
42. (a) Report
Related Theory
Related Theory
 DBMS and RDBMS are types of software used or
 Reports are useful for decision making and analysis.
managing databases.
In base reports are created using Report Wizard.
 MySQL is a RDBMS that uses DML statements to
manipulate data. 43. (d) Form
36. (d) Tables Explanation: Form provides an interface for
the user to input and modify data.
Explanation: A database consists of a
collection of tables. Each table is a group of 44. (d) Newspaper
fields that contain data of similar types. A
Explanation: A database is a collection of
record is collection of data values that are
logically related data items stored in an
logically related.
organised manner. Newspaper has information
Related Theory that is in no way logically related.
 In relational data models a table is also called a 45. (a) Relational Data Model
relation.
Explanation: A relational data model is based
37. (b) form on relations between tables of the same
Explanation: A form enables users to view, database.
enter, and change data directly in database
objects such as tables. Related Theory
 In a Hierarchical data model records are arranged in
38. (a) ascending a tree like model. In network data model records are
Explanation: ORDER BY clause is used to linked to the same master file.
arrange the data retrieved by the SELECT
statement in order. By default data is arranged
46. (b) Both the tables must have a common field
in ascending order. To arrange data in Explanation: A relation between two tables is
descending order DESC keyword is used. set using a common field. This field is primary
key for one of the tables and foreign key for
39. (b) UPDATE other table.

Related Theory 47. (b) One-to-many

 UPDATE is a DML command and is used to change Explanation: A student studies more than one
or modify records in a table. subjects. So for every record of student, there
 To modify the structure of tables ALTER command is are multiple records in subject table.
used. COMMIT is used to write the updated changes
in data to the disk. MODIFY is used with ALTER TABLE 48. (c) Drag and Drop
command to change the existing columns of a table
Explanation: To create a relationship between
Caution two tables the common field is dragged
 Any kind of changes made in the data of tables fromone table and dropped in the Relationship
becomes effective when we use the respective Design window.

108 One Shot Information Technology Class X

49. (c) Criterion
Related Theory
Explanation: In query Design window the
conditions on groups can be set using the  .Odt are the files created using OO Writer, .ods are
the files created using OO Calc and .odp are the files
criterion row.
created using OO Impress.
50. (b) Available Fields
59. Select, Update, Delete and Insert
Explanation: The Query wizard contains the
steps pane on the left side and Quet Details 60. Queries are used to retrieve data from a table
Area on the right side. Once the tables of the based on a condition.
query are selected from the Tables List box
the corresponding fields are displayed in the 61. WHERE
Available Fields List box.
62.
WHERE ORDER BY
51. (b) It can contain only text fields
Explanation: A form is used for data entry so it WHERE clause is used ORDER BY clause
can contain field of all data types. to select particular is used to sort the
rows from a table results of a query
52. (b) Help Text based on a condition. according to values in
some columns.
Related Theory
 To provide tool tip with any of the form controls right 63. UPDATE command is used to modify the
click on the control in form design window. From records in a relation. Suppose we want to
the context menu select Control Properties option. increase the marks of all the students whose
Properties:<type of the control> Dialog box will
marks are less than 35 in table ClassX by 5,
open. Scroll down to Help Text property and add the
text you want to display. then the UPDATE command will be written as:
UPDATE ClassX SET marks=marks+5 WHERE
53. (b) Dynamic marks<35;
Explanation: A dynamic report changes when
the value of the corresponding field in the table 64. Forms are needed to get data from the user in
changes, but a static report doesn’t change. an interactive mode. The data that is entered in
a form is stored in tables.
Related Theory
 By default reports are created as dynamic report in 65. Reports are created to present the required
Report Builder wizard. data in a summarised form for decision making
and analysis purpose.
54. Data in RDBMS is organised in different tables.
Each table contains data that is logically 66. To create a form and reports we need to define
related. All the tables of a RDBMS database a database, with some tables.
are linked or related through some common
field.
67.
Data Information
55. A table is structured in form a defined number
of columns or fields that hold data values. A Data are raw facts Information is the
set of logically related data values is called a and figures. processed data.
record, tuple or row of a table. Each field is also
known as attribute and contains data of one 68. When two tables are related in a database
particular type only. it reduces data redundancy and data
inconsistency.
56.
Tuples Attributes 69. Alias row is used to display meaningful names
of the fields included in query.
A set of logically Attributes is the set of
related data values data values of same
in a table is called type. It is also called a 70.
Static Dynamic
a tuple or row or a field or a column.
record. (1) A Static Dynamic reports au-
report’s data tomatically change
Number of tuples in Number of attributes is not changed when the data in
a table is called its of a table is called its when the the database table
cardinality. degree. c o r re s p o n d i n g changes.
data in the
57. .odb database tables
58. .odt, .ods, .odp is updated.

Database Management System 109

 (i) Date stores dates from range 1/1/99 to
(2) In the last step All the reports by
of the report default are dynamic. 1/1/9999.
wizard STATIC (ii) Time stores time as seconds since
option should be 1/1/1970.
selected to make (iii) Date/time data types store data as a
the report static. combination of date and time values.
71. (5) Boolean data types store yes/no or true/
Primary Key Foreign Key
false.
Primary Key is the Foreign Key is that
column in a table that field of a table which 73. Three types of relationships can be formed in
is used to uniquely is primary key of Base. These are :
identify each record some other table. (1) One – to-One: In one-to- one relationship
of a table. each record in table A has only one
There can be only There can be more matching record in table B and each record
one primary key in a than one foreign keys in B can have only one matching record in
table. in a table. table A.

Primary keys are by Foreign key can hold (2) One-to-Many: In one-to-many
default described duplicate values and relationship, a record in table A can have
with the UNIQUE can also contain many matching records in table B, but
constraint i.e. the NULL. each record in table B will have only one
primary key column matching record in table A.
cannot contain (3) Many-to-Many: In many-to-many
duplicate values and
relationship each record in table A has
can’t be NULL.
multiple matching records in Table B and
vice versa is also true.
72. Data types used in DBMS / RDBMS are of
following types: 74. Arranging records in a relation according to
(1) Number data types to store numeric the values in a column is called sorting. Sorting
values. It is of two types: can be done in either ascending order or
(i) Integer to store positive or negative non descending order.
fractional numbers. These are further
75. DBMS ensures that the relationship between
classified as:
the tables of a database and restricts
• Tinyint to store numbers between
accidental modification or deletion of records
0-255
in a table. To implement this a set of rules is
• Smallint to store numbers between defined which is called referential integrity.
-215 to 215 -1
In a database with two tables, "Employees"
• Integer to store numbers between–
and "Departments," where the "Employees"
231 to 231-1
table has a foreign key "DepartmentID"
• Bigint to store numbers between referencing the primary key "DepartmentID" in
-263 to 263 -1 the "Departments" table:
(ii) Real number data types store fractional
Employee Table
or real numbers. These are:
• Numeric or decimal markdown
Employee I D| Name | DepartmentID
• Real or float or double to store
numbers upto 15 places of decimal. 1 | John | 101

(2) Alphanumeric types to store text values. 2 | Jane | 102

Everything stored in these data types is 3 | Alice | 101
treated as text. Longvarchar, char, varchar Departments Table:
and varchar_ignorecase are all text data markdown
types
DepartmentID | Department Name
(3) Binary Types are used to store the data
101 | Sales
in binary format. This helps in storing
102 | Marketing
pictures, images, audio and video etc.
(4) Date time data types store date and time Here, referential integrity ensures that every
data. "DepartmentID" in the "Employees" table

110 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 corresponds to a valid "DepartmentID" in the that any references to that department in the
"Departments" table. If a department is deleted "Employees" table are handled appropriately
or renamed, the database system ensures to maintain data integrity.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (d) 80. (b) 81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (c) 85. (d)

Answer 86. (c) 87. (c) 88. (d) 89. (d) 90. (d) 91. (a) 92. (c) 93. (d) 94. (a) 95. (c)
Key 96. (c) 97. (b) 98. (c) 99. (b) 100. (d) 101. (a) 102. (d) 103. (a) 104. (a) 105. (c)
106. (b) 107. (d) 108. (d) 109. (d) 110. (d) 111. (a) 112. (d) 113. (c) 114. (c) 115. (c)

76. (c) Select stored as 0 and true as 1 or any other non-zero

value.
Related Theory
 The SELECT statement in SQL is used to retrieve
82. (b) back-ends
records. WHERE clause of SELECT statement is used Explanation: A database server runs on a
to filter the records according to a given criterion. network-based application and maintains
Select and Update are DML commands, create and database files.
Alter are DDL commands.
A database client helps to communicate
77. (a) row between a client application and the database.
Database client is also known as front-ends
Related Theory as these are the user interfaces. A database
 A column or a field is a set of data values of similar model is the approach used for database
type. A row is a logically related set of data that management.
represents a unique entity. The attribute of a table
that has all unique values is called a primary key.
83. (b) columns, rows

78. (b) Relational Related Theory

Explanation: A relational data models data  Vertical columns of a table are identified by their
and relationship amongst data as a collection names and are called fields. The rows are identified
of tables called relations. In a Flat file system by the set of values they contain and are called
data is stored in a single table records or tuples.

79. (d) Entry Required 84. (c) either relational or flat file
Explanation: In Base when a new table is
Related Theory
created in Design View field’s property can be
set by opening the respective table in design  In relational data model records are organised into
tables. There are multiple tables that are linked to
View. Setting Entry Required field will make
each other via some common attribute. Flat file also
data entry in that field mandatory. stores data as tables but it uses one single table for
all values.
Related Theory
 CREATE TABLE command in SQL is used to define 85. (d) Oracle
structure of a table. Various constraints can be Explanation: RDBMS stands for Relational
defined on columns as well as the table. For a Database Management System. It is a type of
column to not to be left blank NOT NULL constraint database management system that organises
is used. data into multiple tables with rows and
80. (b) Default columns. These tables are linked via common
fields.
Explanation: The value given in default text
box of a table opened in design view will be 86. (c) Database concept
added to a field at the time of data entry, in Explanation: A database is a structured and
case the user doesn’t enter a value for that systematic way to store information that can
field. be easily accessed, managed, and updated.
81. (c) Boolean The data is stored in form of a table with rows
and columns.
Explanation: Boolean data type is used to
store data as TRUE or FALSE. The False value is 87. (c) Data redundancy

Database Management System 111

 88. (d) Composite primary key to interact with the database without directly
Explanation: A composite primary key is a working with tables or queries.
combination of two or more columns that
97. (b) 3
uniquely identifies each row in a table. When
Explanation: Relationships are links defined
a table has a composite primary key, it means
to associate two tables through one or more
that the primary key consists of two or more
common fields. The three types of relationships
columns. The combination of values in these
that can be formed in tables of a database are
columns must be unique for each record in the
as follows:
table.
(1) One-to-one: In this type of relationship,
Related Theory each record in first table can have only
 A primary key is a special database constraint that one matching record in second table and
uniquely identifies each record in a table. It ensures in second table each record can have only
that there are no duplicate rows and provides a way one matching record in first table.
to establish relationships between tables. (2) One-to-many: In this type of relationship,
a record in first table can have many
89. (d) Record or tuple
matching records in second table, however
Explanation: A table in a database consists a record in second table can have only one
of rows and columns. A row is a horizontal matching record in first table.
element and holds a single group of related
(3) Many-to-many: In this type of relationship,
data within a table. It is also known as tuple.
each record in first table have many
matching records in second table and a
Related Theory
record in second table can have many
 Columns are vertical, and hold a list of values all from
matching records in first table.
the same field. These are also known as attributes.
98. (c) SQL
90. (d) Length
Explanation: SQL stands for Structured Query
Explanation: Entry required option in table
Language. It is a language used for managing
design view, if set to yes makes it mandatory
and manipulating relational databases. It
to input value in that field. Default value option
serves as a standard interface for interacting
is used to set a default value for the field when
with relational database management
no value is provided by the user. Length is used
to determine the number of characters that systems (RDBMS), allowing users to perform
can be stored in text/ varchar type field. various operations such as querying, updating,
inserting, and deleting data in a database.
91. (a) Filtering
99. (b) Varchar
92. (c) OpenOffice Writer Explanation: Varchar is a data type used to
Explanation: OpenOffice Base and Microsoft store variable-length character strings. It is an
Access both are RDBMS. Microsoft Excel also indeterminate length string data type and can
stores data in worksheets. OpenOffice Writer hold numbers, letters and special characters.
is a word Processor application and hence
cannot store data. 100. (d) F5
Explanation: F5 is used to execute the current
93. (d) 50 query and Ctrl + E is used to switch between
SQL view and design view.
Related Theory
 The length of char and varchar data types can be set 101. (a) 1
using the length option in table design view. Explanation: The primary key is a unique
identifier for each record in the table and is
94. (a) Flat file
used to ensure the uniqueness of each row.
95. (c) Design view
Related Theory
96. (c) Form  The primary key of one table can be used as a
Explanation: Forms refer to a feature that foreign key in another table to establish relationships
allows users to create user-friendly interfaces between tables.
for entering, viewing, and manipulating data
stored in a database. Forms provide a way 102. (d) Impress
to present data in a structured and visually Explanation: Impress from OpenOffice is used
appealing manner, making it easier for users to make multimedia presentations.

112 One Shot Information Technology Class X

103. (a) photos, music files, etc. 110. (d) INSERT INTO
Explanation: The Binary data type in SQL
is used to store non-textual data such as Related Theory
images, audios and videos. It can be used in  Syntax of INSERT INTO:
two variations: BINARY(n), which specifies INSERT INTO table_name(column1, column2,
a fixed-length binary string of n bytes, and column3……..)VALUES(value1, value2, value3…….)
VARBINAY(n), which specifies a variable-length 111. (a) SELECT
binary string with a maximum length of n
bytes. Related Theory
 SELECT is a DML command and can be used to
Related Theory retrieve data from a table or one or more tables
 Some other commonly used data types in SQL based on some conditions.
are INT, FLOAT, CHAR, VARCHAR, TEXT, DATE and
BOOLEAN Related Theory
 Syntax of SELECT:
104. (a) WHERE SELECT<column1>, <column2>, <column3>,
Explanation: The SQL SELECT statement is <columnN> FROM table_name.
used to retrieve data from a database table.
112. (d) Delete
The basic syntax of a SELECT statement is:
Explanation: To remove relationships applied
SELECT column1, column2, ...
on the tables, right click on the relationship
FROM table_name WHERE condition; thread and select Delete option.
column1, column2, … : This is a comma-
separated list of the columns you want to
113. (c) Asc
retrieve data from. You can use * to select all Explanation: The keyword ASC is used with
columns. ORDER BY statement to sort the records in
ascending order. The general syntax to use this
table_name: This is the name of the table from statement to view the records is as follows:
which you want to retrieve data.
SELECT * FROM table_name ORDER BY
105. (c) Tuples column_name ASC
Explanation: In a table, rows are known as E.g. SELETCT * FROM Student ORDER BY Name
tuples while columns are referred to as fields ASC
or attributes. The above SQL statement will display all the
records from the Student table in ascending
106. (b) One-to-one order of the name of students.
Explanation: In One-to-one relationship,
each record of first table can have only one Related Theory
matching record in second table and each  ORDER BY command sorts the result set in ascending
record in second table can have only one order by default. The DESC keyword is used to
matching record in first table. arrange the records in descending order.

107. (d) Numeric 114. (c) LONGVARBINARY

Explanation: BINARY, VARBINARY,
Explanation: Tinyint, Smallint, Integer, Bigint
LONGVARBINARY are the data types used
are numeric data types to store integer values.
for storing binary data like images, audio file,
Real, float or double data types are used to
video file and other large documents.
store real values.
115. (c) text (varchar)
108. (d) attribute
Explanation: In OpenOffice Base, when you
Explanation: An attribute of a table is a set create a new table using SQL commands
of similar data types. It is also called field or without explicitly specifying a data type for
column. each field, they will be created as Varchar(255)
data type. This is a variable-length character
109. (d) All of the above
string data type. It can hold text data up to a
Explanation: A DBMS provides backup and maximum of 255 characters. When creating
recovery features that enable organisations to a table for the first time, this default option
recover damaged or lost data. It also ensures provides some flexibility. It can handle different
data security by giving authorisation feature to text-based information that users may not
access data. always be aware of in advance.

Database Management System 113

116. (A) insert into Fabric values (‘F005’, ‘Kurta’, (D) Yes, we can make more than one column
‘Woollen’,5); (1 mark) as a primary key in a table and it is known
(B) select * from Fabric where Disc>10; as Composite Primary Key.
(C) select * from Fabric where type = 122. (A) Select*from Datesheet order by Date of
‘Woollen’; Exam;
(D) update fabric set Disc = Disc + 10 where (B) Select*from Datesheet;
Fname = ‘Shirt’; (C) Select Sub_Name, Date of Exam from
(E) delete from fabric where ID =‘F003’; Datesheet where Days= ‘Monday’;
(D) Select Sub_Name, Date of Exam from
117. (A) Datesheet where Sub_Name = ‘Science’;
Itemno integer (10) 123. (A) SELECT pname FROM product WHERE
category = “domestic”;
Iname varchar (15)
(B) SELECT pname, price FROM product
Price decimal (5,2) WHERE quantity < 50;
(C) SELECT price, quantity FROM product
Quantity Integer (3)
WHERE pname = “LAPTOP”;
(D) SELECT pname, quantity
(B) (i) Select price * quantity from item;
(ii) Select * from item where price < 50; 124. Flat File: Data is stored in a single table.
Usually suitable for less amount of data.
118. (A) Select * from teachers where subject = Relational Database: Data is stored in
“COMPUTER”; multiple tables and the tables are linked using
(B) Select * from teachers where salary >= a common field. Relational is suitable for
20000 and salary <= 35000; medium to large amount of data
(C) Select Subject from Teachers where age > 125. Create table Product (
40; PID Char(4),
(D) Select * from teachers order by name Pname Varchar(20),
119. (A) SELECT * FROM Student WHERE House= Description Varchar(40),
“GREEN”; Price Decimal
(B) UPDATE Student SET Marks= Marks+5 );
FROM Student WHERE Admno=1005;
126. (A) Select * from Vendor;
(C) SELECT * FROM Student WHERE Marks < (B) INSERT INTO Vender (Vendor ID, VName,
80; Date of Registration, Values ('VOO5;
(D) SELECT * FROM Student ORDER BY Marks 'Vadilal', '2010-03-20', 'Pune');
DESC; (C) UPDATE Vendor
120. (A) Four fields and four records are there in SET location= “Gujarat'฀
table Sales. WHERE Vendor ID= 'VOO3';
(B) SQL commands: 127. TINYINT, SMALLĪNT, INTEGER, NUMERIC, BIGINT
(i) select Sale_Id, Price from Sales where
128. One to many relationship or many to one
Discount > 1000;
relationship
(ii) select * from Sales order by Prod_Name;
(iii) select Prod_Name, Price- Discount from 129. A report helps to display the data in a
Sales; summarized manner. It is used to generate the
overall work outcome in a clear format. Reports
121. (A) A database management system is a are required for the purpose of decision making
software package with computer programs and analysis.
that controls the creation, maintenance,
and use of a database. It allows 130. 0
Entry Required Default Value
organizations to conveniently develop
databases for various applications. If set to yes then it A default value can
(B) Two databases are: will be necessary be set for a field if
for the user to insert user don’t provide
(1) Microsoft Access
the value in the field any value while
(2) MySQL which means that entering the values in
(3) OpenOffice Base field cannot be left the table.
(C) Id field will be suitable for Primary Key. blank.

114 One Shot Information Technology Class X

131. Referential Integrity is used to maintain Column Name Data Type
accuracy and consistency of data in a
relationship. In Base, data can be linked PID (Primary key) Char (4)
between two or more tables with the help of Pname Varchar (20)
primary key and foreign key constraints.
Runs Int (5)
Referential integrity helps to avoid data
inconsistency. Gender Char (1)

132. 0 DOB Date

Columns Data type
136. Numeric data types: TinyInt, SmallInt, Integer,
Flight No Text BigInt, Decimal, Real, Float, Double and
No. of Passengers Integer Boolean.

Airlines Text Alphanumeric Data types: Char(fix), Varchar,

Varchar_ignorecase and Longvarchar (Memo)
Arrival Time Date/Time
137. Data Consistency refers to the accuracy,
Departure Time Date/Time reliability, and uniformity of data across all
Fares Float databases or data storage systems within an
organisation. It ensures that all copies of the
133. The database tables support following types data reflect the same information, eliminating
of relationships: discrepancies or conflicts. This consistency
(1) One-to-One: In this relationship both is vital for making informed decisions,
tables of relational database must have maintaining trust in the data, and ensuring the
primary key columns. Each record in one smooth operation of business processes.
table is directly related to a single record
138. DDL(Data Definition language) is used to
in another table, and vice versa. This
create database. DDL consists of commands
relationship is established using a common
like CREATE TABLE, ALTER TABLE, DROP TABLE,
key, typically a primary key in one table
TRUNCATE TABLE and RENAME TABLE.
and a foreign key in the other.
DML(Data Manipulation Language) is used
(2) One-to-many: A one-to-many relationship to manipulate database. DML consists of
is a type of association between two commands like SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE,
tables where each record in the primary DELETE and MERGE.
table can have multiple related records
in the secondary table, but each record 139. The data types for all the fields are given:
in the secondary table is associated with Order_ID – Char
only one record in the primary table. This Customer_ID – Char
relationship is often established using Amount – Float
primary and foreign keys.
Order_date - Date
(3) Many-to-many: A many-to-many
relationship in relational databases refers 140. (A) SELECT BkID, BkName, Author, Qty, Price
to an association between two tables FROM Books WHERE Qty> 3;
where each record in one table can be (B) SELECT SUM(Qty * Price) AS TotalAmount
related to multiple records in the other
FROM Books WHERE Price < 500;
table, and vice versa. (Any two)
141. (A) CREATE TABLE EMPLOYEE (EMPID
134. The output of a query can be arranged in varchar(4)), EMPNAME varchar(15), DESIGN
ascending or descending order of the values of varchar(20), SALARY decimal(6,2));
a column. This is called Sorting.
(B) A primary key is a column or columns that
contain values that uniquely identify each
Related Theory
row in a table.
 The SQL command ORDER BY is used to sort the
records. By default, the records are arranged in
(C)
ascending order, but using the keyword DESC, you
DML DDL
can arrange them in descending order.
SELECT ALTER
135. The attributes and their data types are as
follows: INSERT DROP

Database Management System 115

142. There are two ways to design a table. (iv) After selecting the Primary key, press
(1) Creating table using Design view: Next button. A window appears to give
table name.
(i) In Openoffice base click on the table
component, and after that select 143. A database server is a specialized computer
create table design view option. The system or software application that is
table design window appears. designed to store, manage, and provide access
(ii) Define table’s field names (table to databases. It serves as a central source for
column), and their data types storing and organising large volumes of data.
specifying sizes. This makes it accessible to users or applications
over a network.
(iii) After defining field name, click on save
icon and give table name. Primary Key: A primary key is a field or a
combination of fields in a database table that
(2) Creating using table wizard uniquely identifies each record in that table.
(i) Select ‘Use wizard to create Table It serves as a means to ensure data integrity,
option’. enforce data uniqueness, and establish
(ii) Click Next Button and set the data relationships between tables in a relational
type of your fields (column heading). database system.
(iii) After defining the data type, a new Foreign Key: A foreign key is a database
window to set primary key appears. constraint that establishes a link between
The Openoffice Base gives three options two tables in a relational database. It defines
to set primary key: a relationship between the data in one table
(the child table) and the data in another table
• Automatically add a primary key. (the parent table) by referencing a unique key
• Manually select one field as a or primary key column in the parent table. The
Primary Key. purpose of a foreign key is to enforce referential
• Set multiple fields as a Primary Key. integrity.

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

116 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
(c) Ethyl isocyanide
Objective Qs 1 mark (d) Methyl isocyanide
1. Along with the safety measures taken by 6. An unexpected event with negative
the employer, the responsibility to prevent consequences occurring without the
accidents also lies with the: intension of the one who suffers because of
(a) Employees it.
(b) Government of the country (a) Evacuation (b) Emergency
(c) Fire Service (c) Accident (d) Celebrations
(d) Police
7. Identify the emergency situations from the
2. During a fire safety drill in Anurag's office, following:
he learns about the acronym PASS for using (I) Extreme Heat Waves
a fire extinguisher. What does PASS stand
(II) Chemical spills
for?
(III) Hurricanes
(a) Safety
(IV) An unwanted guest at home
(b) First aid
(V) Floods
(c) Evacuation
(d) How to Use a fire Extinguisher (VI) No cold water bottles in the refrigerator
(VII) Drought
3. In Mansi's office, regular mock drills are (VIII) Due date past for assignment
essential for safety preparedness. Mock submission
drills for which two scenarios should be
carried out from time to time? (a) (I), (II), (III), (V), (VII)
(a) Fire And electric (b) (IV), (VI), (VIII)
(b) Fire and fall (c) (I), (II), (III), (IV)
(c) Slip, trip and fall (d) (V) (VI), (VII), (VIII)
(d) Handling equipment 8. Any source of potential damage, harm or
adverse health effect.
4. During an office safety training, Bushra
learns about a device that detects grounding (a) Emergency (b) Accident
problems and shuts off electricity to prevent (c) Hazard (d) First aid
a possible accident. What is this device? Question No. 9 to 11 consist of two statements
(a) MCB (b) Switch Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
(c) GFCI (d) All of these questions selecting the appropriate option
given:
5. During a safety training session, Sakshi (a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
learns about the tragic Bhopal Gas Tragedy. correct explanation of (A).
Thousands of people died due to inhaling (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
which poisonous gas? correct explanation of (A).
(a) Carbon dioxide (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
(b) Carbon monoxide (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.

High difficulty Qs, adapted from well-known reference books.

Managing Health and Safety 117

 9. Assertion (A): During a fire it is often workers. For this they have set up a team that
suggested that one should will ensure that all the precautions are taken to
kneel down and move out handle any emergency situations.
of the place crawling. (A) Since it is an office set up, it has mainly
Reason(R): The smoke rises up in the files and computer systems and the
air, so chances of choking furniture for the staff. What type of fire
due to smoke are less near extinguisher should the team choose to
the floor. be installed in the office.
(B) All the computer system in the office are
10. Assertion (A): Most of the emergency
connected through LAN. What should be
situations can be handled
kept in mind before laying down network
easily when a panic is
cables.
created.
(C) The office floor is mopped every three
Reason(R): Handling of emergency
hours. Although all the precautions are
requires special procedures.
taken but still there are many incidents of
11. Assertion (A): In case of a fire, stairs must slip and fall. How can this be prevented?
be used for evacuation. (D) One day during the fire mock drill
Reason(R): Elevators must not be used workers got stuck in stairway. What
during fire. should be done to avoid this in case of a
real emergency? Give two points.
Case Based Qs 4 marks
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
12. With an increase in the number of accidents
on road and in house, and an increase in the 14. List two areas in which employees should be
made aware and trained properly to avoid
cases of fire in high rise buildings, Anuja’s
workplace accidents.
school administration has decided to bring in
an awareness about the emergency situations 15. Why is there a need to check electrical
and how to handle them , among students of wirings at regular time intervals?
their school. In the process of this, they have
decided to provide children proper training for 16. What are the three methods of extinguishing
evacuation, first aid and fire handling. To begin fire?
with, first of all students were given a mock 17. What is non-emergency first aid?
drill for fire situation.
(A) What is a mock drill? 18. What are the three P’s?
(B) Apart from providing training to the 19. How are water and foam fire extinguishers
students, what other measures should different?
be taken by the administration for safe
and quick evacuation of children from
school premises in case of an emergency.
Long Qs 4 marks
Give any one solution. 20. ‘Prevention is better than cure’. In the
(C) Fire men were called in school to tell light of the above statement list some
children about some precautions they safety measures that should be taken at
should take in case of fire. Write any one workplaces.
such precaution.
21. In case of an accident on road, what actions
(D) Children were asked to remember some
must be taken by the rescuers.
emergency numbers to call in case of an
emergency be at school, home or any 22. What measures should be taken by an
other place. What are the numbers? organisation to ensure safe and quick
evacuation during emergencies?
13. ABC pvt ltd. Is setting up their new office.
They are concerned about the safety to their 23. What are the different types of fire?

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

(a) Health hazards (b) emergency
Objective Qs 1 mark (c) accidents (d) all of these

24. An organisation can face some ............... 25. Hazards can be of different types depending
that could put the lives of the employees in on the ............... and the ............... in which the
danger. employees work.

118 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (a) conditions, place (a) eye strain
(b) salary, perks (b) sore eyes
(c) time, place (c) dry eyes
(d) industry, environment (d) eye strain and sore eyes

26. Organisation must have a designated 34. Air and water pollution can be analysed by
............... for emergencies using–physical, ............. and .............. analysis.
(a) financial, economical
(a) staff (b) policies
(b) Psychologial, financial
(c) assembly point (d) none of these
(c) chemical, biological
27. To provide healthy and safe working (d) None of these
environment, every organisation must have
.................. .
35. The pH value of the water can be measured
through .................... analysis.
(a) Cleanliness
(a) chemical (b) physical
(b) Filtered water
(c) biological (d) none of these
(c) Clean washroom
(d) All of the above 36. The ............................. indicators are used to
monitor the health of the ecosystem.
28. Air pollution is mostly caused by production (a) physical (b) chemical
of the ................ in the surrounding air. (c) economical (d) microbial
(a) dust
37. Working with wrists extended too much
(b) mixture of solid particles
repetition can cause ............
(c) gases
(a) Sore wrists (b) sore shoulders
(d) All of above
(c) arching wrists (d) stiff neck
29. Repetitive use of muscle may feel pain in 38. If a cord or wire crosses a pathway it should
your ............ be marked with ............
(a) neck (a) red marker (b) hazard tape
(b) shoulder (c) sign board (d) some obstacle
(c) wrist or fingers
39. The keyboard should have a matt surface to
(d) All of the above
avoid ............ glare.
30. For an organisation, the proper security (a) reflective (b) inductive
procedures will reduce ................ . (c) sunlight (d) light
(a) liabilities
40. In fire classification, all liquid, grease, and
(b) insurance gas material comes under .................. .
(c) business revenue (a) Class A material
(d) operational charges of the company (b) Class B material
(c) Class C material
31. Sore lower back is caused due to ................. .
(d) Class D material
(a) reaching forward frequently
(b) no lumbar support 41. In fire classification, material magnesium,
(c) no upper back support from chair potassium, and sodium comes under
(d) reaching forward for long periods ............... .
(a) Class A material
32. What should you do with the problem of dry (b) Class B material
eyes? (c) Class C material
(a) Forget to blink (d) Class D material
(b) Rest eyes periodically and do simple eye
exercises
42. In fire classification, material wood, cloth,
and paper comes under ................ .
(c) Do exercise
(a) Class A material
(d) Blink the eyes
(b) Class B material
33. If light is coming directly behind or in front (c) Class C material
of you then you may suffer from ................. . (d) Class D material

Managing Health and Safety 119

 43. In fire classification, electrical material and (a) safe, risk , hazards
equipment comes under .................... . (b) big, dirt, pollution
(a) Class A material (c) crowded, traitors, pests
(b) Class B material (d) luxurious, food charges, time
(c) Class C material boundations.
(d) Class D material 51. The proper security procedures will increase
44. Which of the following contains everything the ............... and will reduce the ............... of
you need to know about evacuating your the company.
facility safely? (a) revenue, operational charges
(a) Evacuation Diagram (b) liabilities, credibility
(b) Emergency Action Plan (c) revenue , liabilities
(c) Employee Directory (d) none of these
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Very Short & Short Qs 1-3 marks
45. The best course of action to take during a
52. Explain any two first aid rules.
medical emergency is to ................ .
(a) Begin first aid immediately 53. What do you mean by occupational hazards?
(b) Activate the emergency plan for
54. Explain the term ‘ Evacuation Policy’.
reporting injuries
(c) Notify the person's family about the 55. Explain the terms Floor Plans and Assembly
situation /areas.
(d) Both (a) and (b) 56. Enlist any three basic safety rules to follow
46. ................... signs can prevent accidents on a at workplace.
staircase with a sharp bent or warn against 57. Describe the importance of periodic
a loose floor tile. evacuation drills.
(a) wet floor
(b) sharp turn
58. Give any two electrical safety rules in any
organization.
(c) watch your steps
(d) All of the above 59. Give any two ways to handle accidents.

47. The ................... should be responsible to 60. Explain Buddy System to implement
handle evacuation process. evacuation efficiently in case of emergency.
(a) Government (b) Management 61. List any three types of occupational hazards.
(c) employees (d) coordinator
62. Explain the terms accident and emergency.
48. Workplace fires are commonly caused by
improper storage of ................. material or 63. Give any three situations of emergency that
............... dust. require evacuation.
(a) flammable, combustible 64. Explain importance of a healthy lifestyle.
(b) electrical, hazardous
65. Briefly explain the concept of health, safety
(c) combustible, oils
and security at workplace.
(d) None of these
66. State the most important reasons for health,
49. Health of an employee is the state of the safety and security programs in workplace.
physical, ................. and ................. well being.
(a) financial, social 67. What is occupational overuse syndrome?
(b) financial, mental 68. What are musculoskeletal problems?
(c) financial, personal
(d) mental , social
69. Why there is no right way to use a laptop?
70. What type of display screen is suitable to
50. The work environment of the organisation
work on computer?
must be ....................... and free from ....................
and ................. . 71. What is a workplace emergency?

120 One Shot Information Technology Class X

Long Qs 4 marks 73. Enlist any four types of accidents.

72. Give a checklist for workstations to minimize 74. Give any four points of a healthy
the hazards. lifestyle.

PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS

(a) Rescue (b) Evacuation
Objective Qs 1 mark (c) First aid (d) surgery
75. ............... is the process of emptying a place in [Mod. CBSE Term-1 2021]
case of an emergency, disaster. 78. Natasha works as floor manager. She has
(a) Accident (b) Evacuation been assigned a task for conducting regular
(c) Hazards (d) Exiting ................... to ensure safety of life in case of
any disaster or emergency by evacuating
[CBSE 2023] the place of danger.
76. ..................... is an unplanned event that (a) Cultural assembly
may happen all of a sudden and may lead (b) Open house events
to unwanted or unprecedented results/ (c) Evacuation drill
outcomes. (d) Trips and excursions [CBSE 2024]
(a) emergency (b) hazard
(c) accident (d) illness [CBSE 2023] Very Short & Short Qs 1 marks

77. ........................ is the immediate assistance 79. Give any two Falls and Slips Safety rules.
provided to the injured to save life and [CBSE 2023]
minimize health loss till the proper medical 80. Mention any two basic fire safety rules to be
aid/facility is provided. followed in any organisation. [CBSE 2024]

PUSH YOURSELF
(High Difficulty Qs for Self-Assessment)
(a) Evacuation (b) Emergency
Objective Questions
(c) Accident (D) Celebrations 1
1. From the points given below, select the most
common causes of accidents at a workplace. 4. In a fire emergency, which factor poses the
greatest risk to individuals and causes more
(I) Slipping, tripping and falling
fatalities due to its rapid spread and harmful
(II) Fire
effects?
(III) Good electrical wiring in place
(a) flames (b) heat
(IV) Exposure to toxic substances
(c) smoke (d) burns 1
(V) Lifting of heavy objects
(VI) Observant employees Question No. 5 and 6 consist of two statements
Assertion (A) and Reason (R). Answer these
(VII) Not putting up caution signs
questions selecting the appropriate option given.
(a) (I), (II), (III), (VII)
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the
(b) (II), (III), (IV), (VII)
correct explanation of (A).
(c) (I), (II), (IV), (VII) (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is not the
(d) All of these 1 correct explanation of (A).
2. ............... is the first response to an illness or (c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
injury before proper medical care is provided. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
(a) Rescue (b) Evacuation 5. Assertion (A): Normally big buildings must
(c) Emergency (d) First Aid 1 have at least two exit routes.
3. A situation which requires urgent attention Reason (R): This gives people a choice to
as it poses immediate risk: use any route. 1

Managing Health and Safety 121

 6. Assertion (A): Fire extinguishers used to (D) He found that the one of the kid has a
exhaust fires of class A, B and swollen arm and he is unable to move it.
C use carbon dioxide. What first aid can be given to him? 4
Reason(R): Carbon dioxide extinguishers
Short Questions
extinguish fire by taking away
the oxygen element and 8. What precautions one should take while
climbing the stairs at work place to avoid an
removing heat with a cold
accident? 2
discharge. 1
9. How can the dangers arisen due to smoke
because of fire at a work place be minimised?
Case Based Question 2
10. How essential is a safe and healthy
7. As Manu was going to his uncle’s house he workplace? 2
witnessed a car crashing into the road divider.
There were two kids and an old lady along Long Questions
with a middle aged driver on board. Manu
11. The office building where Karishma works,
desperately wants to help them. suddenly was under fire, there are more
(A) What should be his first step? than 200 people in the building. Describe
the general evacuation process that should
(B) What must he do to provide first aid? be followed. 4
(C) Suddenly he sees some smoke coming 12. List some reasons for slips, trips and falls in
out of the car, what should be done now? work places 4

122 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS
Answer 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (d)
Key 11. (b)

1. (a) Employees consequences. Accidents can take place

Explanation: All the employees must follow anywhere at home, at workplace or in any
general safety precautions along with the open area.
safety guidelines of a particular work place to
7. (a) (I), (II), (III), (V), (VII)
avoid accidents at work.

2. (d) How to use a fire extinguisher Related Theory

Explanation: The basic steps for using a fire  Blizzards, Dam failure, earthquake, electrocution,
extinguisher can be remembered by acronym pandemics, thunder storms, Poisoning, terrorist
attacks, tornadoes, radioactive release etc are other
PASS, where P is for ‘PULL’ out safety pin
types of emergencies.
A is for ‘Aim’
S is for ‘ SQUEEZE’ the operating levers 8. (c) Hazard
S is for ‘ SPRAY’ at the bottom of the fire.
Related Theory
3. (a) Fire and Electric  Sources of workplace hazards are many. These
Explanation: Fire and electric safety drills are include substances such as some chemicals, process
carried out to train people for emergencies like such as welding or carrying loads, behaviour such as
bullying, condition such as wet floor, material such
a fire outbreak or a short circuit or an accident
as knives or other sharp objects and energy sources
due to an electrical appliance. These mock drills
such as electricity.
train for evacuation procedures, first aid, and
Do’s and Don’ts of any emergency situation. 9. (a) Both (A) and (R) are tru,e and (R) is the
correct explanation of (A).
4. (c) GFCI

Related Theory Related Theory

 GFCI is Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
 Response time in case of any accident or emergency
is important. In case of fire it is critical. Smoke
5. (d) Methyl isocyanide produced during fires is highly toxic. It affects in very
short span as follows:
Related Theory Within 30 Seconds create disorientation.
 The gas Methyl isocyanide leaked from the pesticide Within 2 Minutes causes unconsciousness.
plant of an American enterprise, Union carbide Within 3 Minutes it causes death.
Corporation at around 1:00 pm on December 3,
1984. 10. (d) (A) is false but (R) is true.
Explanation: Handling of emergency requires
6. (c) Accident certain emergency procedures. It is very
Explanation: Accidents are unplanned important to keep calm and not to panic in
and unwanted events that have negative case of an emergency.

Managing Health and Safety 123

11. (b) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the Prevent Further Injury: The next aim should
correct explanation of (A). be to keep the injured person safe from further
Explanation: In case of a fire, electrical wires injury.
of elevators can get burnt, the doors can get Promote recovery: One should try to help and
stuck and it is a possibility that they do not fix the injuries of the injured person.
open and due to smoke in the lift cabin can
cause suffocation. 19. Both the fire extinguishers work by taking
away the heat element from the fire, however
12. (A) Mock drill is the practice of evacuation in water fire extinguishers work for class A fires
case of fire. only while foam fire extinguishers work for
(B) Way to all emergency exits should be Class B and C fires.
marked clearly and at place where children
can easily take notice. 20. At work place we must follow following safety
(C) Do not make use of Elevators during fire. measures to avoid accidents:
(D) 100 and 112 for police. 102 and 108 for (1) The office arrangement must be such that
ambulance. it allows free movement of the people.
(2) Steps, stairs and floorings must be well
13. (A) Carbon dioxide extinguisher. maintained and free from clutter.
(B) All the wires and cords should be properly
(3) Mark any differences in the floor levels
fixed to avoid trip and falls.
clearly.
(C) The slip and fall incidents can be prevented
(4) Markings on the glass door should be
by putting up a caution sign for wet floor.
provided to avoid people walking into them.
(D) Stairway should be free of any type of clut-
(5) Any spills or leakages should be
ter. There should be proper emergency
lights in the stairway. immediately cleaned.
(6) Electrical wirings and appliances must be
14. Employees should be trained on how to lift and checked regularly.
handle objects or equipment at workplace.
(7) People should use appropriate footwears
They should be trained for being attentive and to avoid slips and falls and also that are apt
observant toward any signs of upcoming dan-
for a particular type of work environment.
gers.
E.g. shoes with heavy soles and fully
15. Short circuit and electrical wirings are one of covering the toe, when working in a factory.
the major reasons for fire. Checking electrical (8) All the electrical cords must be fixed and
installations regularly helps identify any loose not allowed to hang loosely.
connections or old wires that may lead to (9) Employees must be trained to be attentive
short circuits. for any alarming situation that may be
16. Three methods of extinguishing fire are: sign of a potential accident.
(1) Cooling: Cooling the heat produced due to (10)Put up safety instructions and emergency
fire is done using water or sand. phone numbers at a place where everyone
(2) Smothering: It is done using blank or foam can notice.
extinguishers to cut off the air or oxygen 21. (1) Injured must be moved to a distance from
from the object that is burning.
the accident spot.
(3) Starvation: It refers to cutting off the fuel
(2) If there is a fire, attempts should be made
supply to restrict the fire.
to put it off.
17. Treatment that is initiated for minor injuries, (3) Ambulance and police should be informed.
cuts, pains or allergies by our own self such as (4) Injured must be given first-aid and kept
cleaning and bandaging cuts, taking over-the- warm till further medical assistance is
counter medicines, is called non-emergency
available.
first-aid. There may or may not be a need of
advanced medical care in such cases. 22. An organisation must have:
18. The three P’s are used to handle accidents. (1) A clear passageway to all exits.
These are: (2) The exit routes clearly marked and must be
Preserve Life: The main objective of the first as short as possible.
aid after accident should be to keep the person (3) Multiple exit routes enough for all the
alive. people to escape.

124 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 (4) Easily operable Emergency doors. Class B: It is due to flammable liquids like
(5) A regular inspection and maintenance of Grease, Oil, Paint or any other solvent
the emergency evacuation routes. Class C: It is due to live electrical equipment.
Class D: It is due to combustible metals like
23. Depending upon the cause of the fire, the fire magnesium, aluminum etc.
can be of following types: Class K: It is due to commercial cooking
Class A: It is due to ordinary combustibles like equipment like cooking oils, animal fats,
wood, paper, cloth etc. vegetable fats etc.

NCERT & CBSE RESOURCE MATERIAL

24. (a) 25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (d)
Answer 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (b) 41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (c)
Key
44. (d) 45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (d) 50. (a) 51. (a)

24. (a) Health hazards their families. If poper security procedures

are followed, day to day accidents and other
25. (d) industry , environment
hazards can be avoided thus reducing the
unnecessary disputes, expenses in form of
Related Theory
compensations and overhead costs.
 The different types of hazards include Physical ,
Chemical , Biological, Mechanical. 31. (b) no lumbar support
26. (c) assembly point
Explanation: Every organisation must have
Related Theory
an evacuation policy for emergencies. And all  Repetition of a seemingly innocuous task over a
the team leaders must inform their members period of time can cause an injury. Egronomics is
about it. concerned with reducing such injuries. Some of the
early signs of such injuries are:
Every employee must know about the Sore lower back, burning in the upper back, stiff neck,
designated assembly point. sore shoulders, aching wrists, dry eyes, Eye strain
and sore eyes
27. (d) All of the above
32. (b) Rest eyes periodically and do simple eye
Related Theory exercises
 Healthy and safe work environment is essential for
Explanation: The problem of dry eyes is
the health of the workers and increasing efficiency.
caused due to a long stare without blinking
28. (b) Mixture of solid particles eyes. While working on computer or watching
Explanation: Air pollution is mixing of television for long periods. The problem can be
unwanted particles in air, making it unfit for dealt with by taking off after short periods and
inhalation. Many industrial processes are such doing some eye exercises.
that they produce tiny solid particles that mix
with air and pllute it. 33. (d) eye strain and sore eyes
Explanation: Proper lighting is very much
29. (d) All of the above essential while working. Most of the time the
Explanation: Repetitive use of muscle causes light must come from our left hand side or
musculoskeletal problems that affect different from the direction of our non-working hand.
areas of our body such as neck, back, arms, Glares from overhead lights or light coming
shoulders and feet etc. from directly behind or n front of us may cause
eye strain and sore eyes. To overcome this
Related Theory issue either the light source must be reoriented
 To avoid musculoskeletal problems or atleast reduce
or the desk and computer must be so adjusted
their effects ergonomics is applied in designing
workspaces. Ergonomics is the science of designing that the issue is addressed.
things and arranging them so as to facilitate their
use and reduce the inconvenience of the users. 34. (c) chemical, biological
Explanation: Maintaining good air and
30. (a) liabilities water quality in an organisation is essential
Explanation: Any workplace accident costs for improving the working capabilities of
an organisation as well as to the injured and employees. For this it is very important to

Managing Health and Safety 125

 analyse the quality of air and water from time emergency. It shows clearly marked ways to
to time using Physical, chemical and biological emergency exit from your current location.
methods. Every organisation has an emergency action
plan according to the kind of work set up.
35. (a) chemical We must follow it to handle the situation
Explanation: pH value of water determines if it effectively.
is fit for drinking or not.
45. (d) Both (a) and (b)
36. (d) microbial Explanation: Giving first aid to the injured
Explanation: The effect of air and water on must be the first priority to reduce the effect
plants and animals is studied to monitor the of the emergency and to save lives. It is quite
health of ecosystem. essential to activate the emergency plan for
reporting injuries so that the right authorities
37. (c) arching wrists take up charge at right time to minimise
casualties.
Related Theory
 Working too long in same position may produce 46. (c) Watch your steps
musculoskeletal injuries. Even the most seemingly Explanation: Slips and falls are mainly due
innocuous tasks may sometime lead to injuries to wet floors, spilled liquids or uneven walking
which take long periods of rehabilitation. surfaces. Accidents on a staircase can be
prevented with ‘ Watch Your steps’ sign.
38. (b) hazard tape
Explanation: A loose wire or cord in a pathway 47. (d) coordinator
is a potential cause of an accident so these Explanation: Each organisation must have an
should be marked with hazard tape. Such cords evacuation procedure in case of emergencies
and wires cause electrical hazards and every employee should be aware of it.
There is also a coordinator, who is in-charge
39. (a) reflective of evacuation during emergencies and
is responsible for taking decisions during
Related Theory emergencies.
 There are several health and safety requirements
for computer workplaces. As for the keyboards they 48. (a) flammable, combustible
should have matte surfaces to reduce glare, the
symbols on the keys must be suitably contrasted for Related Theory
proper legibility. There must be adequate space in  There are three main types of fire hazards mostly
front of the keyboard for the hands of the user and in all facilities. These are combustible materials,
it should be kept at proper distance from the screen flammable materials and electrical hazards.
and convenient distance from the user.
49. (d) mental, social
40. (b) Class B material Explanation: Overall health of a person is
Explanation: In most work places there are not in being only physically fit but in being
three main types of fire hazards that need to mentally strong and socially active.
be addressed. These are electrical hazards,
combustible materials and flammable 50. (a) safe, risk , hazards
materials. Explanation: Every organisation must provide
Materials that burn when exposed to ignition safe and healthy environment for their
sources are Class B Materials. employees. This increases productivity and
efficiency of the employees.
41. (d) Class D material
Explanation: Materials that are volatile and 51. (a) revenue, operational charges
ignite quickly are Class D materials. Explanation: Security is freedom from any
potential harm.
42. (a) Class A material
Explanation: Materials that do not ignite on
52. (1) Elevate the injured area above the level of
the heart.
their own but continue to burn once ignited are
Class A materials. (2) Keep the injured warm and comfortable.

43. (c) Class C material 53. An illness acquired due to the occupation is
called occupational hazard.
Explanation: Materials that cause fire very
quickly and present a risk of arc flash are Class 54. Evacuation Policy is a plan to be followed to
C material under fire classification. evacuate a place in case of an emergency.
44. (d) Both (a) and (b) 55. Floor Plan: It shows the possible evacuation
Explanation: Evacuation diagrams contain routes in a building using colour codes and
proper way out of the building in case of arrows.

126 One Shot Information Technology Class X

 Assembly areas: These are the designated 67. Occupational overuse syndrome, also known
areas where all the employees must gather as repetition strain injury (RSI) is a range of
after evacuation. It should be made sure that conditions, due to discomfort or persistent pain
everyone knows about these areas. in muscles, tendons and other soft tissues. It is
aggravated with work, repetitive movement,
56. At workplace ensure: sustained postures, stress in working
(1) All the wires are fixed and no cords are environment.
hanging loose.
(2) Wastebaskets and other objects should not
68. Musculoskeletal problem includes different
areas of our body, such as neck, back, chests,
obstruct the walkways
arms, shoulders and feet and occurs because
(3) Office specific safety tips should be placed of the wrong posture, uncomfortable chair etc.
at an easily noticeable point.
69. As Laptops have screen and keyboard too
57. Periodic evacuation drills are conducted to close so there is no right way to use a laptop.
train people about the evacuation procedures
in case of an emergency. 70. Display screens must be of legible size .
there should be proper spacing between
58. (1) All outlets must be securely mounted. the characters and lines. There should be no
(2) Use GFCI(Ground –Fault Circuit Interrupter) flickering, or reflective glare.
to detect and shut electricity off to prevent
accident. 71. A serious situation or crisis that needs
immediate attention and action.
59. Medical team must be called immediately to
handle any injuries. 72. (1) The workstations must be well lit and provide
sufficient and comfortable space for the user.
Follow emergency drill procedures.
(2) There must be windows fitted with
60. In case of an evacuation emergency, specially adjustable coverings to alter the sunlight
abled people need assistance to evacuate and level.
reach the assembly ground safely. For this (3) Characters displayed on the display screen
each such person is assigned a buddy who will must be well-defined and of adequate size
help them. This is the buddy system. and spacing.
61. Some occupational hazards are physical, (4) The display screen should have a stable
biological, chemical, behavioural and slipping image and easily adjustable brightness
hazards. and contrast.
(5) User must be able to tilt and swivel the
62. Accident is an unplanned and unintentional display screen easily.
incident that happens all of a sudden and may
(6) It should be free from glare and reflections.
result in unwanted consequences.
(7) The keyboard should be such that it should
Emergency is a sudden alarming situation that
allow the user to adopt a comfortable
requires immediate attention.
working position.
63. Evacuation is required in following emergency (8) It should have clearly legible symbols on
situations: the keys.
Fire, workplace violence, toxic material release, (9) The working surface have a low reflective
civil disturbance, explosion, earthquake, floods, surface.
hurricane, tornado.
73. Different types of accidents are:
64. Healthy lifestyle is important for a healthy (1) Accidents at workplace: Slips and fall
living. Health and happiness increases the accidents, fire
efficiency of a worker. (2) Industrial disease/illness
65. Health of an employee is the state of the (3) Road traffic accidents
physical, mental and social well-being of a (4) Clinical Accidents
person. Health of an employee must be in a (5) Sports related accidents
good condition for efficient working.
Safety refers to work place being free from 74. Healthy lifestyle includes:
any risks and hazards. Security refers to every (1) healthy eating habits
employee feeling safe from any potential (2) physical exercise
harm. (3) sound sleep
66. Health, safety and security is important for (4) managing stress
better efficiency of the employees. (5) setting long term and short term goals

Managing Health and Safety 127

 PREVIOUS YEAR QUESTIONS
Answer 75. (b) 76. (c) 77. (c)
Key
75. (b) Evacuation pretend and train individuals or groups on
Explanation: An evacuation route is a way to the proper procedures to follow during an
get out of a building if there is an emergency, emergency evacuation from a building or area.
such as a fire. During an evacuation drill, participants are
trained for the evacuation routes, assembly
Related Theory points, use of emergency equipment such
 Drill is a practice exercise to prepare individuals for a as fire extinguishers or emergency exits,
potential emergency. It is a procedure that involves communication protocols, and overall safety
the simulation of emergency circumstances, such procedures.
as fire, earthquake, lockdowns, or active shooter
incidents, to train individuals to respond in a real-life
scenario. Related Theory
 Emergency refers to an unexpected situation that  Evacuation is the process of emptying a place in case
needs immediate attention and action. of an emergency such as fire, natural disasters etc.

76. (c) Accident 79. The safety rules for falls and slips are:
Explanation: An accident can be defined (1) Keep the walking area clean and clutter
as an unfortunate incident that occurs
unintentionally and causes hazardous results. free.
(2) Wear non slippery footwear.
77. (c) First aid
(3) Floors must be clean and dry.
Related Theory (4) Oil spills, dust must be immediately cleaned.
 Every organisation must have a first aid kit which
80. The basic fire safety rules are as follows:
should include necessary items such as Hydrogen
Peroxide, Calamine lotion, Aspirin etc. These items (1) Smoke alarms should be installed in proper
should be regularly checked for the expiry and places.
replaced whenever required. (2) Emergency exits for fire escape should be
made at proper place.
78. (c) Evacuation drill
Explanation: An evacuation drill is a planned (3) A regular drill should be organized for the
and organised practice session designed to purpose of training people. (Any two)

PUSH YOURSELF

Scan QR code to download

wers of
Push Yourself

128 One Shot Information Technology Class X